Sony Stereo System BDV IT1000ES User Manual

4-109-708-13(1)  
BD/DVD Home Theatre System  
Operating Instructions  
BDV-IT1000ES/BDV-IS1000  
(1)  
© 2008 Sony Corporation  
Sony Corporation Printed in Malaysia  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Date of Manufacture Marking is located on the rear  
exterior.  
WARNING  
To reduce the risk of fire or electric  
shock, do not expose this apparatus to  
rain or moisture.  
The following FCC statement applies only to the  
version of this model manufactured for sale in the  
USA. Other versions may not comply with FCC  
technical regulations.  
Caution – The use of optical instruments  
with this product will increase eye  
hazard.  
WARNING  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there  
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna (aerial).  
– Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
Do not install the appliance in a confined space, such  
as a bookcase or built-in cabinet.  
To reduce the risk of fire, do not cover the ventilation  
opening of the apparatus with newspapers, tablecloths,  
curtains, etc. Do not place the naked flame sources  
such as lighted candles on the apparatus.  
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not  
expose this apparatus to dripping or splashing, and do  
not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on  
the apparatus.  
Do not expose batteries or apparatus with battery-  
installed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the  
like.  
In door use only.  
For the customers in the U.S.A  
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit  
different from that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV  
technician for help.  
CAUTION  
THIS CLASS B DIGITAL DEVICE COMPLIES  
WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES OPERATION  
IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO  
CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT  
CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2)  
THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY  
INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING  
INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE  
UNDESIRED OPERATION.  
This symbol is intended to alert the user to  
the presence of uninsulated “dangerous  
voltage” within the product’s enclosure that  
may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute  
a risk of electric shock to persons.  
This symbol is intended to alert the user to  
the presence of important operating and  
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the  
literature accompanying the appliance.  
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications  
not expressly approved in this manual could void your  
authority to operate this equipment.  
Owner’s Record  
The model and serial numbers are located at the rear  
exterior of the control unit. Record the serial number in  
the space provided below. Refer to them whenever you  
call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product.  
Model No. BDV-IT1000ES/BDV-IS1000  
Serial No.______________  
Important Safety Instructions  
1) Read these instructions.  
2) Keep these instructions.  
3) Heed all warnings.  
4) Follow all instructions.  
US  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note to CATV system installer:  
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6) Clean only with dry cloth.  
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system  
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that  
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in  
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be  
connected to the grounding system of the building, as  
close to the point of cable entry as practical.  
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in  
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.  
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as  
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus  
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or  
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two  
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding  
type plug has two blades and a third grounding  
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are  
provided for your safety. If the provided plug does  
not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for  
replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
Notice for the customers in  
Canada  
For the wireless transceiver  
(EZW-RT10)  
This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian  
ICES-003.  
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or  
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience  
receptacles, and the point where they exit from the  
apparatus.  
This device complies with RSS-Gen of IC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation of this  
device.  
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the  
manufacturer.  
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or  
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with  
the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution  
when moving the cart/apparatus combination to  
avoid injury from tip-over.  
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure  
limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets  
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure  
rules. This equipment should be installed and operated  
with at least 20cm and more between the radiator and  
person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists,  
feet and ankles).  
Precautions  
On power sources  
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or  
when unused for long periods of time.  
• The unit is not disconnected from the AC power  
source (mains) as long as it is connected to the wall  
outlet (mains), even if the unit itself has been turned  
off.  
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been  
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or  
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects  
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has  
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate  
normally, or has been dropped.  
• Install this system so that the AC power cord (mains  
lead) can be unplugged from the wall socket  
immediately in the event of trouble.  
Copyrights and Trademarks  
• This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other  
intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be  
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home  
and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise  
authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
• This system incorporates with Dolby* Digital and  
Dolby Pro Logic (II) adaptive matrix surround  
decoder and the DTS** Digital Surround System.  
* Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories.  
For the wireless transceiver  
(EZW-RT10)  
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in  
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure  
limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets  
the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in  
Supplement C to OET65. This equipment should be  
installed and operated with at least 20cm and more  
between the radiator and person’s body (excluding  
extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).  
US  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
**Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent  
#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;  
5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 & other U.S.  
and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS  
is a registered trademark and the DTS logos,  
Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio  
are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS,  
Inc. All Rights Reserved.  
About This Operating  
Instructions  
• The instructions in this Operating Instructions  
describe the controls on the remote. You can  
also use the controls on the unit if they have the  
same or similar names as those on the remote.  
• This system incorporates High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface (HDMITM) technology.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
• Icons, such as  
, listed at the top of each  
explanation indicate what kind of media can be  
used with the function being explained.  
For details, see “Playable Discs” (page 130).  
• In this manual, “disc” is used as a general  
reference for the BDs, DVDs, or CDs unless  
otherwise specified by the text or illustrations.  
• The instructions in this manual are for BDV-  
IT1000ES and BDV-IS1000. BDV-IT1000ES  
is the model used for illustration purposes.  
Any difference in operation is clearly indicated  
in the text, for example, “BDV-IT1000ES.”  
• The Control Menu items may vary depending  
on the area.  
• “BRAVIA” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
• “S-AIR” and its logo are trademarks of Sony  
Corporation.  
• “AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of  
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. and Sony  
Corporation.  
• Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun  
Microsystems, Inc.  
, “XMB,” and “xross media bar” are trademarks of  
Sony Corporation and Sony Computer Entertainment  
Inc.  
• Measurements are expressed in feet (ft) for  
North American models.  
• “PLAYSTATION” is a trademark of Sony Computer  
Entertainment Inc.  
• The default setting is underlined.  
• “Blu-ray Disc” is a trademark.  
• “Blu-ray Disc,” “DVD+RW,” “DVD-RW,”  
“DVD+R,” “DVD-R,” “DVD VIDEO,” and “CD”  
logos are trademarks.  
• “x.v.Color” and “x.v.Color” logo are trademarks of  
Sony Corporation.  
• “PhotoTV HD” and the “PhotoTV HD” logo are  
trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
• Other system and product names are generally  
trademarks or registered trademarks of the  
manufacturers. ™ and ® marks are not indicated in  
this document.  
US  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About the S-AIR function  
The system is compatible with the S-AIR  
function, which allows transmission of sound  
between S-AIR products wirelessly.  
The following S-AIR products can be used with  
the system:  
• Surround amplifier (supplied): You can enjoy  
surround speaker sound wirelessly.  
• Surround back amplifier (optional): You can  
enjoy surround back speaker sound wirelessly.  
• S-AIR receiver (optional): You can enjoy  
system sound in another room.  
The S-AIR product can be purchased as an  
option (the S-AIR product lineup differs  
depending on the area).  
Notes or instructions for the surround amplifier  
or S-AIR receiver in this operating instructions  
refer only to when the surround amplifier or  
S-AIR receiver is used.  
For details on the S-AIR function, see “Using an  
US  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Table of Contents  
Step 1: Assembling  
Step 4: Setting up the Wireless  
Step 5: Performing the Easy  
Step 6: Enjoying Sound by Each  
Playable Discs .................................... 130  
Terms and Conditions of Use and End  
User License Agreement.............. 140  
Using the DIGITAL MEDIA PORT  
Adapter ...........................................88  
Using the Control for HDMI Function for  
“BRAVIA” Sync ............................95  
Calibrating the Appropriate Settings  
Automatically .................................98  
Controlling the TV or Other Components  
with the Supplied Remote.............101  
Deactivating the Buttons on  
the Unit .........................................106  
US  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
: For system operations  
: For TV operations  
Index to Parts and  
Control  
For more information, refer to the pages  
indicated in parentheses.  
: For set-top box/digital satellite  
receiver/Sony component (such as VCR, or  
DVD player/recorder, etc.) operations  
Remote control  
A THEATER (96)  
Switches to the optimum video mode for  
watching movies automatically.  
For details of using the remote, see “Using the  
ONE-TOUCH PLAY (65, 96)  
By only pressing the button, the TV turns  
on, the TV is set for BD/DVD input  
selector, and the system starts playing a disc  
automatically.  
ONE-TOUCH  
AV  
THEATER  
PLAY  
1
2
BRAVIA Sync  
STB  
TV  
BD  
OPERATION CHANGE  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
AV "/1 (on/standby) (101)  
3
7
9
Turns on the connected component such as  
the TV or set-top box/digital satellite  
receiver, or set to standby mode.  
CLEAR  
TIME  
/ENTER  
FAVORITES  
AUDIO  
CC  
WIDE  
SUBTITLE ANGLE  
TV INPUT  
DISPLAY  
4
SCENE  
"/1 (on/standby) (60, 65, 83)  
Turns on the system, or set to standby  
mode.  
TONE  
NIGHT  
BLUE  
SEARCH  
5
6
RED  
GREEN  
YELLOW  
B
A (open/close) (65)  
Opens or closes the disc tray.  
7
OPERATION CHANGE (16, 101)  
Changes the source to be operated on the  
remote.  
: You can operate set-top box/digital  
satellite receiver.  
FUNCTION  
SOUND MODE  
8
9
PRESET  
TUNING  
REPLAY ADVANCE PRESET  
TUNING  
: You can operate TV.  
: You can operate the unit.  
S-AIR MODE  
C Number buttons (65, 84, 101)  
VOLUME  
CH  
MUTING  
Enters the title/chapter numbers or radio  
frequencies, etc.  
0
qa  
Clears the entry field.  
TUNER  
MENU  
DIRECT  
TUNING  
SLEEP  
A/V DECODING DVD RECORDER  
SYNC  
MODE  
HDD  
DVD  
TIME (71)  
DISPLAY  
Displays the elapsed/remaining playback  
time in the front panel display.  
With the cover opened.  
Enters the selected item.  
Number 5, FAVORITES/AUDIO, CH +, and  
H buttons have a tactile dot. Use the tactile dot  
as a reference when operating.  
US  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D AUDIO (81)  
Selects the audio format/track.  
G TOP MENU (69)  
Opens or closes the BD’s or DVD’s Top  
Menu.  
SUBTITLE (68)  
POP UP/MENU (69)  
Opens or closes the BD-ROM’s Pop-up  
Menu, or the DVD’s menu.  
Selects the subtitle language when multi-  
lingual subtitles are recorded on a BD-  
ROM/DVD VIDEO.  
ANGLE (68)  
Switches to other viewing angles when  
multi-angles are recorded on a BD-ROM/  
DVD VIDEO.  
Displays the options menu that can be  
selected appears on the TV screen.  
TV INPUT (101)  
Enters or exits the system’s home menu.  
Switches the TV’s input source between the  
TV and other input sources.  
FAVORITES (101)  
Returns to the previous display.  
Displays the favorite channel list.  
Changes the subtitle of the TV.  
Moves the highlight to select a displayed  
item.  
Changes the aspect ratio of the connected  
TV.  
Enters the selected item.  
E SCENE SEARCH (70)  
Switches to Scene Search mode that lets  
you move quickly between scenes within  
the title currently being played back.  
GUIDE (101)  
Displays the Digital Electronic Programme  
Guide (EPG).  
Adjusts the sound by changing the  
frequency envelope of a sound.  
Displays the operation menu for the current  
display.  
NIGHT (105)  
Activates the night mode function.  
DISPLAY (71)  
Displays the playback information on the  
TV screen.  
Selects the playback source.  
SOUND MODE (80)  
Selects a suitable sound mode for movies or  
music.  
F Color buttons (RED/GREEN/BLUE/  
Short cut keys for selecting items on some  
BD’s menus (can also be used for BD’s  
Java interactive operations).  
US  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
./> (previous/next) (65, 73, 75)  
K SLEEP (106)  
Sets the sleep timer.  
Skips to the previous/next chapter, track, or  
file. To go to the beginning of the previous  
track, press . twice.  
TUNER MENU (86)  
Enters the menu for the tuner settings.  
DIRECT TUNING (86)  
Selects the radio frequencies.  
PRESET +/– (83)  
Selects the preset radio station.  
A/V SYNC (73)  
Adjusts the delay between the picture and  
sound.  
REPLAY/ADVANCE (65)  
Replays the scene/briefly fast forwards the  
scene.  
DECODING MODE (77)  
Selects the system’s pre-programmed  
decoding modes that bring exciting and  
powerful sound of movie theaters into your  
home.  
m/M (fast reverse/fast forward) (65,  
Fast reverses/fast forwards the disc when  
pressed during playback.  
Each time you press the button, search  
speed changes.  
DISPLAY (83)  
Changes the radio information in the front  
panel display between radio frequency and  
station name.  
To resume normal speed, press H.  
TUNING +/– (83)  
Searches the radio station.  
DVD RECORDER (101)  
Changes the operation mode for Sony DVD  
recorders.  
HDD: HDD mode  
Starts or re-starts playback.  
DVD: DVD mode  
Plays a slideshow when a disc containing  
JPEG image files is inserted.  
X (pause) (65, 73, 75)  
Pauses or re-starts playback.  
x (stop) (65, 73, 75)  
Stops playback and remembers the stop  
point (resume point).  
The resume point for a title/track is the last  
point you played or the last photo for a  
photo folder.  
S-AIR MODE (89)  
Selects playback mode for the S-AIR  
receiver.  
Turn off the sound temporarily.  
Adjusts the volume.  
Selects the channels up and down.  
US  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front panel  
FUNCTION  
VOLUME  
HDMI  
S-AIR  
A
"/1 (on/standby) (65)  
C S-AIR indicator  
Lights up when the S-AIR transceiver is  
inserted in the unit and the system transmits  
the sound.  
Turns on the unit, or sets to standby mode.  
B Soft-touch buttons (65)  
These buttons work by touching lightly  
around the printed area or projecting part.  
Do not press them strongly.  
D HDMI indicator  
Lights up when the HDMI OUT jack is  
correctly connected to HDCP (High-  
bandwidth Digital Content Protection)  
compliant device with HDMI or DVI  
(Digital Visual Interface) input.  
H (play)  
Starts or re-starts playback.  
Plays a slideshow when a disc containing  
JPEG image files is inserted.  
E DISC indicator  
x (stop)  
Flashing: The system is loading a disc.  
Lighting up: A disc is loaded. (When no  
disc is loaded, the DISC indicator is not lit.)  
Stops playback and remembers the stop  
point (resume point).  
The resume point for a title/track is the last  
point you played or the last photo for a  
photo folder.  
F Front panel display  
H
(remote sensor) (16)  
FUNCTION  
Selects the playback source.  
VOLUME +/–  
Adjusts the system’s volume.  
A (open/close)  
Opens or closes the disc tray.  
US  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front panel display  
About the indications in the front panel display  
+
D
EX  
TrueHD  
TUNED  
MONO ST  
EXT  
HD  
SLEEP  
24P NIGHT  
PL  
NEO:6  
D C S  
x
DTS HD MSTR HI RES  
DTS ES 96 / 24 LBR  
MATRIX L PCM  
DISCRETE AAC  
HDMI12  
A Playing status  
H Lights up when the system is  
accessing the network.  
B Lights up when a station is received.  
(Radio only) (83)  
I Lights up when outputting 1920 ×  
1080p/24Hz video signals.  
C Monaural/Stereo effect (Radio only)  
J Lights up when the night mode is on.  
(105)  
D Lights up when the external memory is  
recognized. (55)  
K Lights up when the HDMI IN1 or 2 jack  
is correctly connected to HDCP (High-  
bandwidth Digital Content Protection)  
compliant device with HDMI or DVI  
(Digital Visual Interface) output.  
E Lights up when outputting 720p/1080i/  
1080p video signals from the HDMI  
OUT jack or 720p/1080i video signals  
from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
jacks.  
L Current sound format  
F Flashes when the sleep timer is set.  
G Displays system’s status such as  
chapter, title, or track number, time  
information, radio frequency, playing  
status, decoding mode, etc.  
US  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rear panel  
BDV-IT1000ES  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT  
IR REMOTE  
TV OPTICAL SAT/CABLE  
DIGITAL  
IN  
P /  
CB  
P
CR  
/
Y
B
R
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OUT  
EZW-RT10  
HDMI  
Y
P
B
/
CB  
P
R
/
CR  
SAT/CABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
LAN(100)  
ANTENNA  
75 COAXIAL  
DC5V  
500mA MAX  
EXTERNAL  
FM  
AM  
R
L
TV  
A.CAL  
MIC  
SPEAKER  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
AUDIO IN  
CENTER WOOFER  
DMPORT  
L
ECM-AC2  
DC5V  
700mA  
R
L
MAX  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
SAT/CABLE IN  
BDV-IS1000  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT  
TV OPTICAL SAT/CABLE  
DIGITAL  
IN  
P /  
CB  
P
CR  
/
Y
B
R
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OUT  
EZW-RT10  
HDMI  
Y
P
B
/
CB  
P
R
/
CR  
SAT/CABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
LAN(100)  
ANTENNA  
75 COAXIAL  
DC5V  
500mA MAX  
EXTERNAL  
FM  
AM  
R
L
TV  
A.CAL  
MIC  
SPEAKER  
CENTER  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
L
WOOFER WOOFER  
AUDIO IN  
DMPORT  
DC5V  
700mA  
MAX  
1
2
ECM-AC2  
R
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
SAT/CABLE IN  
A LAN (100) terminal (56)  
J AM terminal (53)  
B COMPONENT VIDEO IN (SAT/CABLE)  
K FM 75Ω COAXIAL jack (53)  
L HDMI OUT jack (48)  
C COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks (48)  
M DMPORT (DIGITAL MEDIA PORT) jack  
D VIDEO OUT (VIDEO, S VIDEO) jacks  
N A.CAL MIC jack (60, 98)  
E HDMI IN1/2 jacks (50)  
O SAT/CABLE IN (VIDEO, AUDIO R/L)  
F IR REMOTE (IN, OUT) (16) (BDV-  
IT1000ES only)  
P TV (AUDIO IN R/L) jacks (48)  
G DIGITAL IN (TV OPTICAL) jack (48)  
H DIGITAL IN (SAT/CABLE OPTICAL,  
R SPEAKER jacks (45)  
COAXIAL) jacks (50)  
I EZW-RT10 slot (54)  
US  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Surround amplifier  
Rear panel  
Front panel  
EZW-RT10  
POWER  
S-AIR ID  
SPEAKER  
A
B
C
POWER/ON LINE  
PHONES  
L
PAIRING  
SURROUND SELECTOR  
SURROUND  
R
SURROUND  
BACK  
A PHONES jack (58)  
F Wireless transceiver (EZW-RT10) slot  
B POWER (ON/OFF) (58, 92)  
C POWER / ON LINE indicator (58, 89)  
D PAIRING indicator (92)  
E PAIRING (92)  
G S-AIR ID switch (58, 89)  
H SPEAKER L jack (45)  
I SPEAKER R jack (45)  
J SURROUND SELECTOR switch (58, 92)  
US  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Unpacking  
BDV-IT1000ES  
• Front speakers (2)  
• Foot pads (thick 2, thin 2)  
• Video cord (1)  
• Remote commander  
(remote) (1)  
• Wall mounting brackets  
(top) (5)  
• Surround speakers (2)  
• R6 (size AA) batteries (2)  
• Calibration mic (1)  
• Wall mounting brackets  
(bottom) (5)  
• Center speaker (1)  
• Subwoofer (1)  
• Bracket covers (10)  
• Surround amplifier (1)  
• Screws (5)  
• Desktop stands (4)  
• AM loop antenna (aerial) (1)  
• Speaker cord cover (1)  
• Speaker cord holder (1)  
• FM wire antenna (aerial) (1)  
• Baffle covers (short 3, long  
2)  
or  
• Wireless transceivers for the  
unit (2)  
• Speaker cords (6, white/red/  
blue/gray/green/purple)  
• Grilles (5)  
• Operating Instructions  
• Basic connections (card)  
US  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
• Unpack the speakers, being careful not to touch the speaker units.  
• Keep speakers away from one another. Speakers are magnetically attracted, may hit each other, and cause damage.  
• Keep magnetic objects such as watches, magnetic card, etc., away from the speakers.  
BDV-IS1000  
• Front speakers (2), center  
speaker (1), and surround  
speakers (2)  
• FM wire antenna (aerial) (1) • Wrench (1)  
or  
• Video cord (1)  
• Surround amplifier (1)  
• Remote commander  
(remote) (1)  
• Speaker cord cover (1)  
• Speaker cord holder (1)  
• R6 (size AA) batteries (2)  
• Calibration mic (1)  
• Subwoofer (1)  
• Wireless transceivers for the  
unit (2)  
• Brackets (5)  
• AM loop antenna (aerial) (1)  
• Operating Instructions  
• Basic connections (card)  
US  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the remote  
Inserting batteries into the remote  
Insert two R6 (size AA) batteries (supplied) by matching the 3 and # ends on the batteries to the  
markings inside the compartment.  
Note  
• Do not leave the remote in an extremely hot or humid place.  
• Do not use a new battery with an old one.  
• Do not drop any foreign object into the remote casing, particularly when replacing the batteries.  
• If you do not intend to use the remote for an extended period of time, remove the batteries to avoid possible damage  
from battery leakage and corrosion.  
About operation of the remote  
You can operate this system, TV, and set-top box/digital satellite receiver using the supplied remote.  
Change the operation mode by using OPERATION CHANGE.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
ONE-TOUCH  
PLAY  
AV  
THEATER  
BRAVIA Sync  
STB  
TV  
BD  
OPERATION CHANGE  
1
2
3
1
2
3
x System operation  
Press BD (BD lights up for 1 second).  
The remote enters system operation mode, and BD lights up when you press buttons for operation.  
When operating the system, point the remote at the remote sensor on the unit.  
x TV operation  
Press TV (TV lights up for 1 second).  
The remote enters TV operation mode, and TV lights up when you press buttons for operation (TV does  
not light up when you press a button that is not available for the TV).  
To operate the TV, set the remote signal to suit your TV. For details, see “Controlling the TV or Other  
US  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
x Set-top box/digital satellite receiver/Sony component (such as VCR, DVD player/recorder,  
etc.) operation  
Press STB (STB lights up for 1 second).  
The remote enters set-top box/digital satellite receiver operation mode, and STB lights up when you  
press buttons for operation (STB does not light up when you press a button that is not available for the  
set-top box/digital satellite receiver).  
To operate the set-top box/digital satellite receiver/Sony Component, set the remote signal to suit your  
set-top box/digital satellite receiver. For details, see “Controlling the TV or Other Components with  
Note  
• Do not expose the remote sensor to direct sunlight or lighting apparatus. Doing so may cause a malfunction.  
To use the remote at a distance from the system  
(BDV-IT1000ES only)  
You can use the remote away from the system by connecting an IR repeater system (not supplied) to  
the unit. Use this optional item when you install the unit in a place where the remote signal cannot be  
received.  
Rear panel of the unit  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT  
IR REMOTE  
TV OPTICAL SAT/CABLE  
DIGITAL  
IN  
P /  
CB  
P /  
CR  
Y
B
R
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OUT  
EZW-RT10  
HDMI  
Y
P
B
/
C
B
PR  
/
CR  
SAT/CABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
LAN(100)  
ANTENNA  
75 COAXIAL  
DC5V  
500mA MAX  
EXTERNAL  
FM  
AM  
R
L
TV  
A.CAL  
MIC  
SPEAKER  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
AUDIO IN  
CENTER WOOFER  
DMPORT  
DC5V  
700mA  
L
ECM-AC2  
R
L
MAX  
AUDIO  
SAT/CABLE IN  
VIDEO  
TE  
O
M
E
R
IR  
IR repeater system  
IN  
T
U
O
US  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 1: Assembling the Speakers  
(BDV-IT1000ES only)  
Before connecting the speakers, assemble the speakers.  
Caution on using the speakers  
When moving the speakers, keep one hand under the desktop stand and hold both sides of the speaker,  
as in the illustration.  
The following actions may damage the speaker.  
– Toppling the speaker.  
– Shaking the speaker.  
– Swinging the speaker.  
– Pushing on the speaker.  
– Hitting the speaker  
Speaker assembly  
Use the parts as follows:  
• Front speakers (2)  
• Surround speakers (2)  
• Center speaker (1)  
• Speaker cords (5, white/red/blue/gray/green)  
• Desktop stands (4)  
• Baffle covers (short 3, long 2)  
• Grilles (5)  
Although the front part of the front speaker is slightly different from that of the surround speaker, the  
assembly method is the same. (The illustrations in the following steps are for the front speakers.)  
About how to connect the speaker cords, see page 45.  
US  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
• Spread a cloth on the floor to avoid damaging the floor when you assemble the speakers.  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker units.  
Ex. Front speaker  
Speaker unit  
Tip  
• You can install the front, center, and surround speakers on a wall by using the wall mounting bracket (supplied)  
(page 33). In this case, you do not need to attach the desktop stand to the speaker.  
• You can install the front and surround speakers directly on the floor by attaching speaker stands (WS-IT1000F  
(optional)).  
How to identify the speakers  
Check the label on the speaker.  
• Front left speaker (L): FRONT L (white)  
• Front right speaker (R): FRONT R (red)  
• Surround left speaker (L): SUR L (blue)  
• Surround right speaker (R): SUR R (gray)  
• Center speaker: CENTER (green)  
Front and surround speakers  
1
Thread the speaker cord through the hole in the bottom of the desktop stand.  
Bottom of the desktop stand  
Speaker cord  
US  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Remove the screw from the speaker.  
The removed screw is used when attaching the desktop stand. Be sure not to lose the screw.  
Front speaker  
Screw  
Surround speaker  
Note  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker unit.  
US  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Connect the speaker cords to the speaker.  
The connector and color tube of the speaker cords are the same color as the label of the jacks to be  
connected.  
Use the speaker cords as follows:  
• Front left speaker (L): White  
• Front right speaker (R): Red  
• Surround left speaker (L): Blue  
• Surround right speaker (R): Gray  
Be sure to match the speaker cords to the appropriate terminals on the speakers: the speaker cord  
with the color tube to 3, and the speaker cord without the color tube to #. Do not catch the  
speaker cord insulation in the speaker terminals.  
Front speaker  
Connector  
Color tube  
3
#
Check the polarity on the label.  
Surround speaker  
Insert the speaker cords into the speaker terminal of the speaker as far as they will go. Ensure that  
the cords are secure by gently pulling on them one at a time.  
Note  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker units.  
Tip  
• When removing the speaker cords from the speaker terminals, pull out the speaker cords while pressing the  
white button on the speaker terminal with a tool such as a flathead screwdriver.  
US  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Attach the speaker to the desktop stand.  
Be careful with the orientation of the desktop stand and speaker.  
Secure the speaker with the screw removed in Step 2.  
Ex. Front speaker  
,
Adjust the length of the cord.  
Screw  
Note  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker unit.  
5
Take up slack in the speaker cord by pulling from the bottom of the desktop stand and  
secure the speaker cord by running it through the slot.  
Speaker cord  
Bottom of the  
desktop stand  
Slot  
Note  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker units.  
US  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Attach the baffle cover to the speaker.  
Use the baffle cover (short) for the front speaker, baffle cover (long) for the surround speaker.  
Press the ends of the baffle cover over the pin(s), then press down to flush fit the speaker front.  
Front speaker  
Surround speaker  
J” mark  
Baffle cover (short)  
Baffle cover (long)  
Note  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker units.  
7
Attach the grille to the speaker.  
Be careful with the orientation of the grille.  
Surround speaker  
Front speaker  
Grille  
Grille  
“SONY” mark  
“SONY” mark  
Note  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker units.  
• Be sure to use the speakers with their grilles attached.  
• Do not push on the attached grille. It may cause damage to the speaker unit.  
US  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Center speaker  
1
Remove the cover from the speaker.  
Pry up the cover by inserting a thin, flat object into the slit in the cover. To replace the cover, see  
Step 3. Be sure not to lose the cover.  
Center speaker  
Cover  
,
Slit  
Note  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker units.  
2
Connect the speaker cords to the speaker.  
Use the speaker cords (green). Be sure to match the speaker cords to the appropriate terminals on  
the speakers: the speaker cord with the color tube to 3, and the speaker cord without the color tube  
to #. Do not catch the speaker cord insulation in the speaker terminals.  
Center speaker  
Connector (green)  
Color tube (green)  
3
#
Check the polarity on the label.  
Note  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker units.  
US  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Secure the speaker cord by running it through the slot, then attach the cover to the  
speaker.  
Center speaker  
Cover  
Slot  
,
Speaker cords  
4
Attach the baffle cover to the speaker.  
Use the baffle cover (short). Press the ends of the baffle cover over the pin, then press down to  
flush fit the speaker front.  
,
Baffle cover (short)  
US  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
6
Attach the grille to the speaker.  
“SONY” mark  
Grille  
Note  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker units.  
• Be sure to use the speakers with their grilles attached.  
• Do not push on the attached grille. It may cause damage to the speaker unit.  
Attach the foot pads to the bottom of the speaker.  
Attach the foot pads (thick) to the front of the speaker and the foot pads (thin) to the rear so that  
the speaker tilts up when installed on a TV stand, etc.  
Foot pads (thick)  
Bottom of the center speaker  
Foot pads (thin)  
Side view  
Foot pads (thin)  
Foot pads (thick)  
US  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fully-assembled illustration  
Front right speaker (R):  
Red label  
Surround rightspeaker (R):  
Gray label  
Front left speaker (L):  
White label  
Surround left speaker (L):  
Blue label  
White  
Red  
Blue  
Gray  
Center speaker:  
Green label  
Green  
Note  
• When moving the front or surround speaker, hold the desktop stand part (1), not the speaker part (2).  
Ex. Front speaker  
US  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 2: Positioning the System  
For the best possible surround sound, all the speakers other than the subwoofer should be placed at the  
same distance from the listening position (A).  
Place the system as illustrated below.  
BDV-IT1000ES  
A Front left speaker (L)  
B Front right speaker (R)  
C Center speaker  
B
D Surround left speaker (L)  
E Surround right speaker (R)  
F Subwoofer  
A
G Unit  
H Surround amplifier  
C
G
* Speaker stands are not supplied.  
E
F
A
A
A
A
H
J
A
D
A
A
For surround back speakers  
(optional)  
I Surround back left speaker (L)  
J Surround back right speaker (R)  
K Surround amplifier  
K
I
BDV-IS1000  
A Front left speaker (L)  
B Front right speaker (R)  
C Center speaker  
B
D Surround left speaker (L)  
E Surround right speaker (R)  
F Subwoofer  
G Unit  
H Surround amplifier  
C
A
G
F
A
A
A
H
J
E
A
A
A
For surround back speakers  
(optional)  
I Surround back left speaker (L)  
J Surround back right speaker (R)  
K Surround amplifier  
A
D
K
I
US  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About the surround back speaker  
You can enjoy 7.1 surround sound with the surround back speakers by purchasing the additional  
surround amplifier (optional). Use the commercially available speakers for the surround back speakers.  
To use the surround amplifier for the surround back speakers, connect the surround back speakers (not  
supplied) to the surround amplifier, see “Using an S-AIR Product” (page 89).  
Note  
• Avoid placing obstructions around the speaker.  
• After installing the speakers, arrange the speaker cords so as not to topple the speakers by catching the speaker cords  
with your foot.  
• Avoid placing the center speaker on the TV.  
• Do not set the speakers in an inclined position.  
• Avoid placing the speakers in locations that are:  
– Extremely hot or cold  
– Dusty or dirty  
– Very humid  
– Subject to vibrations  
– Subject to direct sunlight  
• Use caution when placing the speakers and/or speaker stands attached to the speakers on a specially treated (waxed,  
oiled, polished, etc.) floor, as staining or discoloration may result.  
• Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine.  
• Do not lean or hang on the speaker, as the speaker may fall down.  
• Do not bend, twist, or fold the speaker grille. (BDV-IT1000ES only)  
• Do not insert an object (especially metal) into a hole on the front part of the speaker. (BDV-IT1000ES only)  
• Avoid placing the speakers close to a CRT-based TV. It may cause color irregularity. (BDV-IT1000ES only)  
• When using the optional stand, we recommend that the speakers are installed on a flat and firm floor (not on a thick  
pile carpet, for example). The speakers may topple over if installed on an inclined or soft floor.  
Tip  
• When you change the positions of the speakers, Sony recommends that you change the settings. For details, see  
US  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the subwoofer efficiently  
To reinforce the bass sound, place the subwoofer as close as possible to a wall.  
Close to a wall  
Note  
• If the subwoofer is to be placed ahead of the front speaker, the distance should be less than 0.5 m (1.6 ft).*  
*
• You may not get the bass sound efficiently when the subwoofer is placed outside (3). You need to adjust the setting  
of the distance from the listening position.  
3
3
US  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Do not place objects on the top of the subwoofer where the speaker unit is installed.  
• Do not place the subwoofer under a desk or in a cabinet, etc.  
• Do not place the subwoofer back of the obstruction, such as TV, etc. Middle range sound will fall.  
TV etc.  
US  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note on handling the subwoofer  
• Do not place your hand into the slit of the subwoofer when lifting it. The speaker driver may be damaged. When  
lifting, hold the bottom of the subwoofer.  
Subwoofer  
Slits  
• Do not push the top of the subwoofer where the speaker unit is installed.  
Speaker unit  
US  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the speakers on a wall  
Caution  
• Contact a screw shop or installer regarding the wall material or screws to be used.  
• Use screws that are suitable for the wall material and strength. As a plaster board wall is especially fragile, attach  
the screws securely to a beam and fasten them to the wall. Install the speakers on a vertical and flat wall where  
reinforcement is applied.  
• Sony is not responsible for accident or damage caused by improper installation, insufficient wall strength or  
improper screw installation, natural calamity, etc.  
BDV-IT1000ES  
1
Decide the installation of the speakers.  
Recommended example:  
Front View  
Center speaker  
Front right speaker (R)  
Front left speaker (L)  
TV  
Position the front speakers so that their centers align with the TV. Position the center speaker so  
that the center of the speaker and the TV are aligned.  
Top View  
TV  
Front right speaker (R)  
Front left speaker (L)  
The surround speakers should be placed as high (or a little higher) than the front speakers.  
Tip  
• For details about positioning the speakers, see “Step 2: Positioning the System” (page 28).  
US  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Decide the speaker position and mark the screw positions.  
You need two screws (not supplied) for each bracket. The following indicates the narrower  
positions of the two screws.  
For the front/surround speakers  
For the center speaker  
565 mm (22 1  
/4 inches)  
565 mm (22 1  
/4 inches)  
3
Remove the cover(s) from the speaker.  
Pry up the cover by inserting a thin, flat object into the slit in the cover.  
Cover  
Slit  
Center speaker  
Front speaker  
Surround speaker  
Note  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker units.  
US  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Connect the speaker cords to the speaker.  
Thread the speaker cord through the holes in the bracket (bottom).  
Use the speaker cords as follows:  
• Front left speaker (L): White  
• Front right speaker (R): Red  
• Surround left speaker (L): Blue  
• Surround right speaker (R): Gray  
• Center speaker: Green  
The connector and color tube of the speaker cords are the same color as the label of the jacks to be  
connected. Be sure to match the speaker cords to the appropriate terminals on the speakers: the  
speaker cord with the color tube to 3, and the speaker cord without the color tube to #. Do not  
catch the speaker cord insulation in the speaker terminals.  
Ex. Front speaker  
Connector  
Color tube  
Check the polarity on the label.  
Center speaker  
Left side  
Front speaker  
Surround speaker  
Insert the speaker cords into the speaker terminal of the speaker as far as they will go. Ensure that  
the cords are secure by gently pulling on them one at a time.  
Note  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker units.  
Tip  
• When removing the speaker cords from the speaker terminals, pull out the speaker cords while pressing the  
white button on the speaker terminal with a tool such as a flathead screwdriver.  
US  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Attach the baffle cover to the speaker.  
Use the baffle cover (short) for the front speaker and center speaker, baffle cover (long) for the  
surround speaker. Press the ends of the baffle cover over the pin(s), then press down to flush fit  
the speaker front.  
Front speaker  
Surround speaker  
J” mark  
Baffle cover (short)  
Baffle cover (long)  
Center speaker  
Baffle cover (short)  
US  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Attach the bracket (bottom) to the speaker.  
Insert the bracket (bottom) into the speaker tightly.  
Ex. Front speaker  
Bracket (bottom)  
Speaker cord  
Note  
• When attaching the bracket, take care not to catch the speaker cord between the speaker and bracket.  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker units.  
7
Attach the bracket (top) to the speaker.  
Insert the bracket (top) into the speaker and secure it with the screw (supplied).  
Screw  
Bracket (top)  
Right side  
Center speaker  
Front speaker Surround speaker  
Note  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker units.  
US  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Secure the speaker to the wall.  
Check the horizontal and vertical position and tightly attach the speaker to the wall (making sure  
the wall is sufficiently thick) using two suitable screws for each bracket (not supplied) in order 1  
and 2.  
2
Center speaker  
1
2
1
Front/Surround speaker  
Note  
• When attaching the speaker, take care not to catch the speaker cord between the speaker and the wall.  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker units.  
9
Attach the bracket cover to the speaker.  
Slide the bracket cover from the front of the speaker.  
Bracket cover  
Front/Surround speaker  
Center speaker  
US  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Attach the grille to the speaker.  
Center speaker  
Grille  
Grille  
“SONY” mark  
Front/Surround speaker  
“SONY” mark  
Note  
• When assembling, take care not to touch the speaker units.  
• Do not push on the attached grille. It may cause damage to the speaker unit.  
US  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BDV-IS1000  
1
2
Prepare screws (not supplied) that are suitable for the holes of the bracket.  
Secure the bracket to the wall using hole 1.  
1
2
3
4
Tip  
• To prevent the speaker from rotating, use the hole 2, too.  
3
Remove the rear cap using the wrench (supplied), and remove the speaker pedestal  
using a screwdriver (+) (not supplied).  
Wrench (supplied)  
Rear cap  
Screw  
Note  
• The removed screw is used in a later Step. Be sure not to lose the screw.  
US  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Push A with the supplied wrench (1), and then remove the speaker cords (2).  
(2)  
(1)  
A
When the lever is down, the When the lever is up, the  
speaker cords are locked.  
speaker cords can be removed.  
5
6
Thread the speaker cords through hole 3.  
3
Reconnect the detached speaker cords, matching 3/# to the appropriate speaker  
terminals (1), and then push the lever down completely (2).  
(2)  
(1)  
3
#
Tip  
• If it is difficult to push the lever down, use the wrench (supplied).  
US  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
8
Reattach the rear cap using the wrench (supplied).  
Secure the speaker to the bracket with the screw in Step 3 using hole 4.  
4
US  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 3: Connecting the System  
See the connection diagram below, and read the additional information from 1 to 8 on the following  
pages.  
Note  
• Be sure to make connections securely to avoid hum and noise.  
• When you connect another component with a volume control, turn up the volume of the other components to a level  
where sound is not distorted.  
BDV-IT1000ES  
3 DIGITAL MEDIA  
PORT adapter  
3 Set-top box/digital satellite  
receiver, VCR, or PlayStation,  
etc.  
2 TV  
4 AM loop antenna (aerial)  
6 External  
memory  
5 Wireless  
transceiver  
4 FM wire antenna (aerial)  
8 AC power cord (mains lead)  
HDMI  
S-AIR  
7 Network  
1 Center speaker  
1 Subwoofer  
1 Front left speaker (L)  
1 Front right speaker (R)  
5 Wireless  
transceiver  
Surround amplifier  
8 AC power cord  
(mains lead)  
1 Surround right speaker (R)  
1 Surround left speaker (L)  
:Signal flow  
US  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BDV-IS1000  
3 DIGITAL MEDIA  
PORT adapter  
3 Set-top box/digital satellite  
receiver, VCR, or PlayStation,  
etc.  
2 TV  
4 AM loop antenna (aerial)  
6 External  
memory  
5 Wireless  
transceiver  
4 FM wire antenna (aerial)  
8 AC power cord (mains lead)  
HDMI  
S-AIR  
7 Network  
1 Front left speaker (L)  
1 Center speaker  
1 Front right speaker (R)  
1 Subwoofer  
5 Wireless  
transceiver  
Surround amplifier  
8 AC power cord  
(mains lead)  
1 Surround right speaker (R)  
1 Surround left speaker (L)  
:Signal flow  
US  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Connecting the Speakers  
Front/center speakers and subwoofer for BDV-IT1000ES  
When connecting speaker cords to the unit, insert the connector until it clicks.  
Rear panel of the unit  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT  
IR REMOTE  
TV OPTICAL SAT/CABLE  
DIGITAL  
IN  
P /  
CB  
P
CR  
/
Y
B
R
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OUT  
EZW-RT10  
HDMI  
Y
PB  
/
C
B
P
R
/
CR  
SAT/CABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
LAN(100)  
ANTENNA  
75 COAXIAL  
DC5V  
500mA MAX  
EXTERNAL  
FM  
AM  
R
L
TV  
A.CAL  
MIC  
SPEAKER  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
AUDIO IN  
CENTER WOOFER  
DMPORT  
DC5V  
700mA  
L
ECM-AC2  
R
L
MAX  
AUDIO  
SAT/CABLE IN  
VIDEO  
To the subwoofer (purple)  
To the center speaker (green)  
FER  
O
O
R
E
W
K
A
TER  
E
P
N
EN  
S
C
T
O
FR  
L
T
N
O
R
FR  
To the front right speaker (R) (red)  
To the front left speaker (L) (white)  
When connecting the speaker cords to the subwoofer, use the speaker cords (purple). Be sure to match  
the speaker cords to the appropriate terminals on the speakers: the speaker cord with the color tube to  
3, and the speaker cord without the color tube to #. Do not catch the speaker cord insulation in the  
speaker terminals.  
Rear of the subwoofer  
Connector (purple)  
#
3
Color tube (purple)  
US  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Front/center speakers and subwoofer for BDV-IS1000  
When connecting to the unit, insert the connector until it clicks.  
Rear panel of the unit  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT  
TV OPTICAL SAT/CABLE  
DIGITAL  
IN  
P /  
CB  
P /  
CR  
Y
B
R
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OUT  
EZW-RT10  
HDMI  
Y
PB  
/
C
B
PR  
/
CR  
SAT/CABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
LAN(100)  
ANTENNA  
75 COAXIAL  
DC5V  
500mA MAX  
EXTERNAL  
FM  
AM  
R
L
TV  
A.CAL  
MIC  
SPEAKER  
CENTER  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
L
WOOFER WOOFER  
AUDIO IN  
DMPORT  
DC5V  
700mA  
1
2
ECM-AC2  
R
L
MAX  
AUDIO  
SAT/CABLE IN  
VIDEO  
To the subwoofer (yellow)  
To the subwoofer (purple)  
WOOFER  
2
R
WOOFER  
1
E
K
R
A
TE  
E
P
N
EN  
S
C
T
O
FR  
L
T
N
O
R
FR  
To the center speaker (green)  
To the front right speaker (R) (red)  
To the front left speaker (L) (white)  
The speaker cords (yellow and purple) are connected to the subwoofer beforehand as follows. When  
re-connecting, be sure to match the speaker cords to the appropriate terminals on the speakers: the  
speaker cord with the color tube to 3, and the speaker cord without the color tube to #. Do not catch  
the speaker cord insulation in the speaker terminals.  
Connector (yellow)  
#
3
Color tube  
(yellow)  
#
3
Connector (purple)  
Color tube  
(purple)  
Rear of the subwoofer  
US  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Surround speakers  
Rear panel of the surround amplifier  
EZW-RT10  
S
P
E
A
K
E
R
S-AIR ID  
SPEAKER  
A
B
C
L
To the surround left speaker (L)  
(blue)  
L
PAIRING  
SURROUND SELECTOR  
SURROUND  
SURROUND  
BACK  
R
R
To the surround right speaker (R) (gray)  
About the speaker cords of the front/center speakers and subwoofer  
You can remove the speaker cords from the connector. With the catch facing down, press and hold the  
connector down against a flat surface (1) and remove the speaker cords from the connector (2).  
(1)  
(2)  
Catch  
When attaching the speaker cords to the connector, be sure to match the polarity of the speaker cords  
and the connector.  
3
#
Connector  
Note  
• Short-circuiting of the speakers may damage the system. To prevent this, make sure the bare wire of each speaker  
cord does not touch another speaker terminal or the bare wire of another speaker cord.  
• Be sure to match the speaker cords to the appropriate speaker terminals: 3 to +, and # to –. If the cords are  
reversed, the sound will lack bass and may be distorted.  
US  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Connecting the TV  
Use the parts as follows:  
• Video cord (1)  
To listen to TV sound from the six speakers of the system, connect the TV and the system with the  
audio cord (not supplied) (A).  
For video output to your TV, check the video input jacks of the TV, and select connection method A,  
B, C, or D. Picture quality improves in order from A (standard) to D (HDMI).  
When the TV has the digital optical output jack, you can improve sound quality by connecting with the  
digital optical cord (not supplied) (B).  
Component video cord  
(not supplied)*  
S video cord  
(not supplied)  
Digital optical cord  
(not supplied)  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
L
A
DIGIT  
BLE  
IN  
T/CA  
SA  
VIDEO OUT  
UT  
TV OPTICAL  
VIDEO O  
C
/
R
R
O
E
P
ID  
V  
COMPONENT  
/
B
P
COAXIAL  
B
O
E
C
ID  
V
Y
To the S video input jack  
of the TV  
To the digital optical output  
jack of the TV  
To the component video input jacks of  
the TV  
Rear panel of the unit  
(Ex. BDV-IT1000ES)  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT  
IR REMOTE  
TV OPTICAL SAT/CABLE  
DIGITAL  
IN  
P /  
CB  
P
CR  
/
Y
B
R
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OUT  
EZW-RT10  
HDMI  
Y
P
B
/
C
B
PR  
/
CR  
SAT/CABLE  
COMPOENT VIDEO IN  
LAN(100)  
ANTENNA  
75 COAXIAL  
DC5V  
500mA MAX  
EXTERNAL  
FM  
AM  
R
L
TV  
A.CAL  
MIC  
SPEAKER  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
AUDIO IN  
CENTER WOOFER  
DMPORT  
DC5V  
700mA  
L
ECM-AC2  
R
L
MAX  
AUDIO  
SAT/CABLIN  
VIDEO  
HDMI** cable  
(not supplied)  
Video cord  
(supplied)  
Audio cord  
(not supplied)  
White  
Red  
VIDEO OUT  
O
E
ID  
-V  
S
O
E
ID  
V
T
U
O
L
R
TV  
A
IN  
IO  
D
U
To the video input jack of  
the TV  
To the HDMI IN jack of the TV  
To the audio output jacks of the TV  
* If your TV accepts progressive format signals, make this connection.  
**HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)  
If your TV has the HDMI jack, make this connection.  
US  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About the HDMI connection  
If you connect a 1080/24p- or 1080p-compatible TV, use a High Speed HDMI cable.  
If you connect a Sony TV that is compatible with the Control for HDMI function (page 95), operation  
is simplified (ex. ONE-TOUCH PLAY: With one touch of the button, the connected TV turns on and  
the input selector on the TV is switched to the system automatically). For details, see “Using the  
Note  
• Be sure to use only an HDMI cable that bears the HDMI logo.  
• When connecting the HDMI cable, make sure that the direction of jacks are the same.  
.
To connect to a TV with DVI input  
Use an HDMI-DVI converter cable (not supplied). The DVI jack does not accept audio signals;  
therefore, the sound is not output from a TV.  
Furthermore, you cannot connect the HDMI OUT jack to DVI jacks that are not HDCP compliant (e.g.,  
DVI jacks on PC displays).  
US  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Connecting the other components  
You can enjoy the connected component(s) using the six speakers of the system.  
• Set-top box/digital satellite receiver, VCR, or PlayStation, etc. (without HDMI OUT jack): 1  
®
• Set-top box/digital satellite receiver or PLAYSTATION 3, etc. (with HDMI OUT jack): 2  
• DIGITAL MEDIA PORT adapter: 3  
Audio connection  
1
A Audio cord  
(not supplied)  
B Digital optical cord  
(not supplied)  
White  
Red  
HDMI cable  
(not supplied)  
2
B Digital coaxial cord  
(not supplied)  
L
R
IO  
A
IN  
E  
B
A
T/C  
A
S
O
E
ID  
V
L
A
N 2  
I
DIGIT  
BLE  
IN  
T/CA  
SA  
IN 1  
TV OPTICAL  
I
M
D
H
COAXAL  
To the audio output jacks of the  
component  
or  
To the digital optical output jack of the component  
To the digital coaxial output jack of the component  
To the HDMI OUT jack  
of the component  
Rear panel of the unit  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEOUT  
IR REMOTE  
TCAL SAT/CABL
DIGITAL  
IN  
P
CB  
/
P /  
CR  
Y
B
R
(Ex. BDV-IT1000ES)  
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OUT  
EZW-RT10  
HDMI  
Y
PB  
/
C
B
P
R
/
CR  
SAT/CABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
LAN(100)  
ANTENNA  
75 COAXIAL  
DC5V  
500mA MAX  
EXTERNAL  
FM  
AM  
R
L
TV  
A.CAL  
MIC  
SPEAKE
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
AUDIO IN  
CENWOOFER  
DMPORT  
DC5V  
700mA  
L
ECM-AC2  
R
L
MAX  
AUDIO  
SAT/CABLE IN  
VIDEO  
Video connection  
1
3
T
DMPOR  
B Component video cord  
(not supplied)  
A Video cord  
(not supplied)  
DC5V  
700mA  
MAX  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
L
R
IO  
D
U
A
IN  
LE  
B
A
T/C  
S
O
E
ID  
V
/
CR  
R
/
CB  
Y
LE  
ID  
B
A
T V  
T/C  
EN  
DIGITAL MEDIA PORT  
adapter  
A
S
IN  
EO  
N
PO  
M
O
C
To the video output  
jack of the component  
To the component video output jacks of  
the component  
US  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connection 1 (SAT/CABLE jacks)  
You need to make both video and audio connections.  
For video connection, check the video output jacks of the component, and select a connection method.  
B (component) offers the better picture quality than A (standard).  
For audio connection, connect the audio cords (A). If the component has a digital optical or coaxial  
output jack, you can improve sound quality by connecting with the digital cord (B).  
Note  
• The system can accept both digital and analog signals. Digital signals have priority over analog signals. (COAXIAL  
has priority over OPTICAL.) If the digital signal ceases, the analog signal will be processed after 2 seconds.  
Connection 2 (HDMI IN1/2 jacks)  
When connecting the system and the component using an HDMI cable, you can enjoy high quality  
digital pictures and sound through the HDMI IN1 or 2 jack. You can connect up to two components.  
Note  
• When connecting the HDMI cable, make sure that the direction of jacks are the same.  
.
Connection 3 (DMPORT jack)  
Connect a DIGITAL MEDIA PORT adapter (not supplied) to the DMPORT jack. For details, see  
Note  
• Connect the DIGITAL MEDIA PORT adapter so that the V marks are aligned. When disconnecting, pull out while  
pressing A.  
A
US  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Relationship between input and output video signal  
The relationship between input and output video signal for each function is as follows.  
Jack(s) that accept  
video signal input  
Jack(s) where video signal is output  
Function  
VIDEO OUT  
(VIDEO)  
VIDEO OUT  
(S VIDEO)  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
HDMI OUT  
“BD/DVD”  
“TUNER FM”  
“TUNER AM”  
None (only video signal  
output)  
a*  
a*  
a*  
a
“SAT/CABLE”  
SAT/CABLE IN  
(VIDEO)  
a
a
a
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN (SAT/CABLE)  
a
“DMPORT”  
DMPORT  
a
a
a
“HDMI1”  
”HDMI2”  
HDMI1, HDMI2  
a: Video signals are output.  
–: Video signals are not output.  
* Depending on the setting of the video output resolution, video signals may be not output. For details, see “Video  
Relationship between input and output audio signal  
The relationship between input and output audio signal for each function is as follows.  
Jack(s) that accept  
audio signal input  
Jack(s) where audio signal is output  
Function  
SPEAKER and  
SPEAKER  
HDMI OUT  
“BD/DVD”  
None (only audio signal  
output)  
a
a
a
*
“TUNER FM”  
“TUNER AM”  
None (only audio signal  
output)  
“TV’  
DIGITAL IN (TV  
OPTICAL)  
TV (AUDIO IN R/L)  
a
a
“SAT/CABLE”  
DIGITAL IN (SAT/  
CABLE OPTICAL,  
COAXIAL)  
SAT/CABLE IN  
(AUDIO R/L)  
a
“DMPORT”  
DMPORT  
a
a
*
“HDMI1”  
”HDMI2”  
HDMI1, HDMI2  
a: Audio signals are output.  
–: Audio signals are not output.  
* You can output sound from both the system’s speakers and TV speaker if you connect the system and TV with an  
HDMI cable (not supplied). To output sound from the HDMI OUT jack, set [Audio (HDMI)] in [HDMI Settings]  
to [TV+AMP]. If the TV has stereo speakers, the sound output from the system’s speakers will also be stereo, even  
if you play a multi-channel source. For details on [Audio (HDMI)], see page 115.  
US  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Connecting the antenna (aerial)  
A
ANTENN  
COAXIAL  
FM wire antenna (aerial)  
(supplied)  
75  
FM  
or  
Rear panel of the unit  
(Ex. BDV-IT1000ES)  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT  
IR REMOTE  
TV OPTICAL SAT/CABLE  
DIGITAL  
IN  
P /  
CB  
P
CR  
/
Y
B
R
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OUT  
EZW-RT10  
HDMI  
Y
P
B
/
C
B
P
R
/
CR  
SAT/CABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
LAN(100)  
ANTENNA  
75 OAXIAL  
DC5V  
500mA MAX  
EXTERNAL  
FM  
AM  
R
L
TV  
A.CAL  
MIC  
SPEAKER  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
AUDIO IN  
CENTER WOOFER  
DMPORT  
DC5V  
700mA  
L
ECM-AC2  
R
L
MAX  
AUDIO  
SAT/CABLE IN  
VIDEO  
AM loop antenna (aerial)  
(supplied)  
A
AM  
B
Note  
• Cord (A) or cord (B) can be connected to either  
terminal.  
Note  
• Keep the AM loop antenna (aerial) and cord away from the system or other AV components, as noise may result.  
• Be sure to fully extend the FM wire antenna (aerial).  
• After connecting the FM wire antenna (aerial), keep it as horizontal as possible.  
Tip  
• Adjust the direction of the AM loop antenna (aerial) for best AM broadcast sound.  
• If you have poor FM reception, use a 75-ohm coaxial cable (not supplied) to connect the unit to an outdoor FM  
antenna (aerial) as shown below.  
Outdoor FM antenna (aerial)  
Unit  
ANTENNA  
75 COAXIAL  
FM  
US  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 Inserting the wireless transceiver  
You can transmit sound from the unit to an S-AIR product, such as a surround amplifier or S-AIR  
receiver.  
An S-AIR product is a component that is compatible with the S-AIR function.  
To use the S-AIR function, you need to insert the wireless transceivers into the unit, surround amplifier,  
and S-AIR receiver.  
For details of the S-AIR function, see “Using an S-AIR Product” (page 89).  
Rear panel of the unit (Ex. BDV-IT1000ES)  
Rear panel of the  
surround amplifier  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT  
IR REMOTE  
TV OPTICAL SAT/CABLE  
DIGITAL  
IN  
P /  
CB  
P /  
CR  
Y
B
R
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
IN  
EZW-RT10  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OUT  
EZW-RT10  
HDMI  
Y
P
B
/
C
B
PR  
/
CR  
SAT/CABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
LAN(100)  
ANTENNA  
75 COAXIAL  
DC5V  
500mA MAX  
S-AIR ID  
SPEAKER  
EXTERNAL  
A
B
C
FM  
AM  
L
R
L
TV  
A.CAL  
MIC  
SPEAKER  
PAIRIN
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
AUDIO IN  
CENTER WOOFER  
DMORT  
DC5V  
700mA  
L
ECM-AC2  
SURROUND LECTOR  
RROUND  
R
R
L
MAX  
RROUND  
BACK  
AUDIO  
SAT/CABLE IN  
VIDEO  
10  
T
-R  
W
Z
E
T10  
-R  
EZW  
Wireless  
transceiver  
Wireless  
transceiver  
Note  
• When you insert the wireless transceiver, make sure that the AC power cord (mains lead) is not connected to a wall  
outlet (mains).  
• Do not touch the terminals of the wireless transceiver.  
• Insert the wireless transceiver with the S-AIR logo facing up.  
• Insert the wireless transceiver so that the V marks are aligned.  
• Do not insert other than the wireless transceiver into the EZW-RT10 slot.  
US  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6 Inserting the external memory  
Insert the external memory (local storage) (not supplied: USM1GH (as of April 2008)) into the  
EXTERNAL slot. By connecting an external memory, you can enjoy additional contents (BonusView)  
depending on the disc.  
Rear panel of the unit (Ex. BDV-IT1000ES)  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT  
IR REMOTE  
TV OPTICAL SAT/CABLE  
DIGITAL  
IN  
P /  
CB  
P /  
CR  
Y
B
R
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OUT  
EZW-RT10  
HDMI  
Y
PB  
/
C
B
PR  
/
CR  
SAT/CABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
LAN(100)  
ANTENNA  
75 COAXIAL  
DC5V  
500mA MAX  
EXTERNAL  
FM  
AM  
R
L
TV  
A.CAL  
MIC  
SPEAKER  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
AUDIO IN  
CENTER WOOFER  
DMPORT  
DC5V  
700mA  
L
ECM-AC2  
R
L
MAX  
AUDIO  
SAT/CABLE IN  
VIDEO  
USM1GH  
(as of April 2008)  
EXTER
With the terminal  
side up  
Note  
• Insert the external memory in the V direction into the EXTERNAL slot as far as it will go.  
• Check that “EXT” lights up in the front panel display when turning the system on.  
To enjoy BonusView  
To remove the external memory  
1
Press "/1 to turn the system off.  
2
Pull out the external memory from the EXTERNAL slot.  
Note  
• Insert the external memory straight. If you force the external memory into the slot, this will cause damage to both  
the external memory and the unit.  
• Keep the external memory away from small children to prevent them from accidentally swallowing the external  
memory.  
• Do not apply too much pressure to the external memory in the slot, as it may cause a malfunction.  
• Use the USM1GH (as of April 2008) external memory only.  
• To avoid data corruption or damage to the external memory, turn the system off when inserting or removing the  
external memory.  
• Do not insert the external memory that contains photo or music files to avoid corrupting the external memory data.  
US  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7 Connecting to the network  
Connect the LAN (100) terminal of the unit to your Internet source using a network cable to update the  
system’s software using the network.  
Make the appropriate settings in [Internet Settings] under [Network Settings] (page 117).  
Rear panel of the unit  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT  
IR REMOTE  
TV OPTICAL SAT/CABLE  
DIGITAL  
IN  
P /  
CB  
P
CR  
/
Y
B
R
(Ex. BDV-IT1000ES)  
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OUT  
EZW-RT10  
HDMI  
Y
PB  
/
C
B
P
R
/
CR  
SAT/CABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
LAN(100)  
ANTENNA  
75 COAXIAL  
DC5V  
500mA MAX  
EXTERNAL  
FM  
AM  
R
L
TV  
A.CAL  
MIC  
SPEAKER  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
AUDIO IN  
CENTER WOOFER  
DMPORT  
DC5V  
700mA  
L
ECM-AC2  
R
L
MAX  
AUDIO  
SAT/CABLE IN  
VIDEO  
When connecting via a wireless  
LAN router  
When connecting to a  
broadband router directly  
Network cable  
(not supplied)  
Wireless LAN router  
(access point)  
(not supplied)  
LAN(100)  
Network cable  
(not supplied)  
Broadband router  
(not supplied)  
Ethernet/wireless  
LAN media converter  
(not supplied)  
To PC  
Network cable  
(not supplied)  
Network cable  
(not supplied)  
To PC  
ADSL modem/  
Cable modem  
(not supplied)  
ADSL modem/  
Cable modem  
(not supplied)  
Internet  
Internet  
To update the system’s software using the network  
Note  
• Do not connect a phone line to the LAN (100) terminal, as it may cause a malfunction.  
• Depending on the modem or router, the type of network (LAN) cable, straight or crossing, differs. For details on  
the network (LAN) cables, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the modem or router.  
• Do not connect the LAN terminal of the unit to the LAN terminal of the PC.  
US  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8 Connecting the AC power cords (mains leads)  
Before connecting the AC power cords (mains leads) of the unit and the surround amplifier to a wall  
outlet (mains), connect the front, center speakers and subwoofer to the unit and surround speakers to  
the surround amplifier.  
Rear panel of the unit (Ex. BDV-IT1000ES)  
Rear panel of the  
surround amplifier  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT  
IR REMOTE  
TV OPTICAL SAT/CABLE  
DIGITAL  
IN  
P /  
CB  
P /  
CR  
Y
B
R
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
IN  
EZW-RT10  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OUT  
EZW-RT10  
HDMI  
Y
P
B
/
C
B
P
R
/
CR  
SAT/CABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
LAN(100)  
ANTENNA  
75 COAXIAL  
DC5V  
500mA MAX  
S-AIR ID  
SPEAKER  
EXTERNAL  
A
B
C
FM  
AM  
L
R
L
TV  
A.CAL  
MIC  
SPEAKER  
PAIRING  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
AUDIO IN  
CENTER WOOFER  
DMPORT  
DC5V  
700mA  
L
ECM-AC2  
SURROUND SELECTOR  
SURROUND  
R
R
L
MAX  
SURROUND  
BACK  
AUDIO  
SAT/CABLE IN  
VIDEO  
To the wall outlet (mains)  
To the wall outlet (mains)  
US  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To check the transmission status  
You can check the status of sound transmission  
between the unit and surround amplifier by  
checking the POWER / ON LINE indicator of  
the surround amplifier.  
Step 4: Setting up the  
Wireless System  
To use the wireless system, you need to set up  
the surround amplifier. Before setting, make  
sure that the wireless transceivers are inserted  
into the unit and the surround amplifier correctly  
POWER / ON LINE Status  
indicator  
Turns green.  
Sound transmission is  
established.  
This wireless system is called “S-AIR.” For  
details of the S-AIR function, see “Using an  
Flashes green.  
Sound transmission is not  
established.  
For details, see “Surround  
"/1  
Turns red.  
Turns off.  
The surround amplifier does  
not output sound.  
HDMI  
S-AIR  
For details, see “Surround  
The surround amplifier turns  
off or its protection is active.  
For details, see “Surround  
POWER / ON LINE  
Indicator  
S-AIR ID switch  
POWER  
EZW-RT10  
POWER  
S-AIR ID  
SPEAKER  
A
B
C
POWER/ON LINE  
PHONES  
L
P
AIRING  
SURROUND SELECTOR  
SURROUND  
To enjoy the sound by using  
headphones  
R
SURROUND  
BACK  
You can enjoy the system’s sound in a place  
apart from the unit by connecting the  
headphones to the PHONES jack on the  
surround amplifier.  
PHONES jack  
SURROUND  
SELECTOR switch  
The unit transmits sound to the surround  
amplifier that is connected to the surround  
speakers. To establish sound transmission,  
perform the following Steps.  
Note  
• When you connect headphones to the surround  
amplifier, neither the unit nor the surround amplifier  
outputs sound from the system’s speakers.  
• The volume of the unit may become minimum if you  
turn off the surround amplifier while the headphones  
are connected to the surround amplifier, or radio  
reception is poor. In this case, “HP NO LINK” and  
“VOLUME MIN” appear alternately in the front  
panel display. Check radio reception, and set the  
volume again.  
1
2
Press "/1 on the unit.  
The system turns on.  
Make sure that the SURROUND  
SELECTOR switch of the surround  
amplifier is set to SURROUND.  
3
4
Set the S-AIR ID switch of the surround  
amplifier to A.  
Press POWER on the surround  
amplifier.  
When you use the multiple S-AIR  
product  
You can prevent miss transmission between the  
S-AIR products by setting a different ID for each  
S-AIR product. For details, see “Establishing  
The POWER / ON LINE indicator turns  
green. If not, check the transmission status  
as follows.  
US  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2
Insert the tabs of the speaker cord  
holder in the slots of the speaker cord  
cover, and press it into place.  
To prevent the transmission by  
neighbors  
To prevent the transmission from neighbors, you  
can identify the unit and the surround amplifier  
by performing the pairing operation. For details,  
Speaker cord holder  
To use the surround amplifier for  
the surround back speakers  
You can enjoy 7.1 surround sound with the  
surround back speakers by purchasing the  
additional surround amplifier.  
Surround amplifier  
To use the surround amplifier for the surround  
back speakers, connect the surround back  
speakers (not supplied) to the surround  
amplifier, set the SURROUND SELECTOR  
switch to SURROUND BACK, and make the  
S-AIR setting for the surround amplifier. For  
m
To attach the cover to the  
surround amplifier  
After connecting and setting, you can attach the  
cover to the surround amplifier for organizing  
and storing excess speaker cords.  
Note  
• When detaching, remove the speaker cord holder,  
then remove the speaker cord cover. To remove the  
speaker cord holder, slightly press the catch of the  
holder and lift off. To remove the speaker cord cover,  
slightly splay open the edges of the cover and slide  
down.  
1
Attach the speaker cord cover by  
sliding it down along the grooves along  
the edges of the surround amplifier.  
• Do not use excessive force to store the cords.  
Speaker cord cover  
Surround amplifier  
Grooves  
Push the speaker cord cover down until you  
hear a click. Turn the surround amplifier  
upside down, then store the cords in the  
speaker cord cover.  
US  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
5
Press X/x to select a language.  
The system displays the menu and subtitles  
in the selected language.  
Step 5: Performing the  
Easy Setup  
Follow the Steps below to make the basic  
adjustments for using the system.  
Displayed items vary depending on the country  
model.  
Press  
or c.  
The setting message appears.  
"/1  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
This message appears only for the fist initial  
setting. It does not appear in the [Easy  
Setup] in [Setup] setting.  
C/X/x/c,  
6
7
Press  
or c.  
The Setup Display for video cable selection  
appears.  
HOME  
FUNCTION  
Easy Setup - TV connection Method  
Select the video cable connecting this unit and the TV.  
Component Video  
Video or S Video  
1
2
Turn on the TV.  
Press [/1 on the unit, and POWER on  
the surround amplifier.  
3
Switch the input selector on your TV so  
that the signal from the system  
appears on the TV screen.  
Press X/x to select the cable used to  
connect the unit and TV.  
Check the connection of the unit and TV  
The Easy Setup Display for OSD language  
selection appears.  
• When you connect the unit and TV with  
the HDMI cable, select [HDMI], go to  
Step 8 and set the video output resolution  
for matching your TV.  
Easy Setup - OSD  
Select the language to be displayed by this unit.  
English  
Français  
Español  
• When you connect the unit and TV with  
the component video cord, select  
[Component Video], go to Step 8 and set  
the video output resolution for matching  
your TV.  
Português  
• When you connect the unit and TV with  
the video or S video cord, select [Video or  
S Video] and go to Step 9.  
If the Easy Setup Display does not  
appear  
Recall the Easy Setup Display. See “To  
US  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Note  
Note  
• When you do not connect the unit and TV with  
the HDMI cable, you cannot select [HDMI].  
• When connecting the HDMI OUT jack and  
other video output jacks at the same time, select  
[Component Video].  
• If the picture is distorted or no picture appears,  
wait for about 30 seconds without pressing any  
buttons. [Is this resolution OK?] appears. Select  
[Cancel]. The display returns to the resolution  
setting screen.  
• If the selected video output resolution is  
incorrect, no picture appears on the screen. In  
this case, press and hold H and A on the unit  
for more than 5 seconds to reset the video output  
resolution to the lowest resolution. To change  
the video output resolution, set [Output Video  
Format] in [Video Settings] (page 109).  
• For details about video output resolution, see  
8
Press  
or c.  
The Setup Display for video output  
resolution selection appears. For details, see  
9
Press  
or c.  
When you select [HDMI] in Step 7  
The Setup Display for selecting the aspect  
ratio of the TV to be connected appears.  
Easy Setup - HDMI Resolution  
Select the resolution to output to the TV. "Auto" is the standard selection.  
The video switches for 30 seconds when this setting is changed.  
Check that there are no problems with the video.  
Easy Setup - TV Type  
Nothing is displayed on the screen if the resolution is incorrect.  
Auto  
Select the screen aspect ratio to match your TV.  
Select from [Auto], [480i], [480p], [720p],  
[1080i], or [1080p].  
When connecting the HDMI OUT jack and  
other video output jacks at the same time,  
video signals may not output from the jacks,  
other than from the HDMI OUT jack, when  
[Auto] or [1080p] is selected.  
10  
11  
Press X/x to select the setting that  
matches your TV type.  
• [16:9]: If you have a wide-screen TV or a  
4:3 standard TV with a wide-screen mode.  
When you select [Component Video] in  
Step 7  
• [4:3]: If you have a 4:3 standard TV.  
Easy Setup - Component Resolution  
Press  
or c.  
Select the resolution to output to the TV.  
The video switches for 30 seconds when this setting is changed.  
Check that there are no problems with the video.  
When you connect the unit and TV with  
the HDMI cable  
Nothing is displayed on the screen if the resolution is incorrect.  
The Setup Display for the [Control for  
HDMI] function appears. Go to Step 12.  
When you do not connect the unit and  
TV with the HDMI cable  
The Setup Display for [Auto Calibration]  
appears. Go to Step 14.  
Select from [480i], [480p], [720p], or  
[1080i].  
When you change the video  
output resolution  
A picture is displayed in the selected  
resolution for about 30 seconds, then the  
display asks for confirmation.  
Follow the on-screen instructions and go to  
the next step.  
US  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Press X/x to select the setting for the  
Control for HDMI function.  
14  
Connect the calibration mic to the  
A.CAL MIC jack on the rear panel.  
Set up the calibration mic at the ear level  
using a tripod, etc. (not supplied). The front  
of each speaker should face the calibration  
mic, and there should be no obstruction  
between the speakers and the calibration  
mic.  
Easy Setup - Control for HDMI  
You can operate this unit in conjunction with a TV connected by HDMI.  
Check your TV settings when using this function.  
On  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT  
IR REMOTE  
T
V
S
A
T
/
C
A
B
L
E
DIGITAL  
IN  
O
P
T
I
C
A
L
CB  
B
CR  
R
P
/
P
/
Y
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OUT  
EZW-RT10  
HDMI  
Y
PB  
/
C
B
P
R
/
CR  
SAT/CABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
LAN(100)  
ANTENNA  
75 COAXIAL  
Select [On] to use the [Control for HDMI]  
function (page 95) when connecting Sony  
components that are compatible with the  
Control for HDMI function.  
DC5V 500mA MAX  
EXTERNAL  
FM  
AM  
R
L
SPEAKER  
TV  
A.CAL  
MIC  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
AUDIO IN  
CENTER WOOFER  
DMPORT  
DC5V  
700mA  
L
ECM-AC2  
R
L
MAX  
AUDIO  
SAT/CABLE N  
VIDEO  
A.CAL  
MIC  
2
C
-A  
M
C
E
If you do not use the [Control for HDMI]  
function, select [Off].  
13  
Press  
or c.  
The Setup Display for [Auto Calibration]  
appears.  
Calibration mic  
Ex. BDV-IT1000ES  
15  
Press X/x to select [OK].  
To cancel, select [Cancel].  
Note  
• Make sure that the headphones are not  
connected to the surround amplifier. You cannot  
operate following Steps with the headphones  
connected.  
US  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
Press  
.
To recall the Easy Setup Display  
[Auto Calibration] starts.  
1
Press HOME.  
The system adjusts the speaker setting  
automatically.  
The home menu appears on the TV screen.  
2
3
Press C/c to select  
Press X/x to select [Easy Setup], then  
press  
[Setup].  
Be quiet during the measurement.  
Note  
.
• Loud test sound is output when [Auto  
Calibration] starts. You cannot turn the volume  
down. Give consideration to children and  
neighbors.  
4
Press C/c to select [Start], then press  
.
The Easy Setup display appears.  
• Before [Auto Calibration], install the surround  
amplifier in the appropriate location. If you  
install the surround amplifier in an improper  
location, such as another room, proper  
measurement will not be obtained.  
• Avoid being in the measurement area and  
making noise during the measurement (which  
takes about 1 minute), as it may interfere with  
measurement.  
• When you use the surround back speakers with  
the optional surround amplifier, install the  
speakers in appropriate location and turn the  
surround amplifier on.  
17  
18  
Confirm the conclusions of [Auto  
Calibration].  
The conclusions appear on the TV screen.  
Press C/c to change the page. The first page  
shows the distance of speakers. The second  
page shows the level of speakers. If the  
conclusions are ok, unplug the calibration  
mic and press X/x to select [OK].  
Note  
• The environment of the room in which the  
system is installed may affect measurements.  
• If measurement fails, follow the message then  
retry [Auto Calibration].  
Press  
.
Easy Setup is finished. All connections and  
setup operations are complete.  
To quit the Easy Setup  
Press HOME in any Step.  
Tip  
• If you change the position of the speakers, reset the  
speaker settings. See “Calibrating the Appropriate  
• If you want to change any of the settings, see  
US  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function  
“HDMI1”/“HDMI2” Component that is  
connected to the HDMI1  
Source  
Step 6: Enjoying Sound  
by Each Function  
or 2 jack on the rear panel  
You can enjoy BD/DVD, TV, Set-top box/  
digital satellite receiver, or VCR sound from all  
the speakers in this system.  
“DMPORT”  
DIGITAL MEDIA  
PORT adapter (page 88)  
Note  
• When you use both the TV (AUDIO IN) jacks  
(analog connection) and DIGITAL IN (TV) jack  
(digital connection), or SAT/CABLE (AUDIO  
IN) jacks (analog connection) and DIGITAL IN  
(SAT/CABLE) jacks (digital connection) at the  
same time, the digital connection takes priority.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
2
Press DECODING MODE repeatedly  
until the decoding mode you want  
appears in the front panel display.  
When you want to output the TV sound or  
stereo sound of a 2 channel source from the  
six speakers, select the “PRO LOGIC,”  
“PLII MOVIE,” or “PLII MUSIC”  
decoding mode.  
FUNCTION  
For details, see page 77.  
DECODING  
MODE  
Note  
• Depending on your TV, you may need to turn off your  
TV’s speaker to enjoy surround sound of the system.  
With the cover opened.  
Tip  
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly until the  
desired function appears in the front  
panel display.  
• When listening to MP3 files or other compressed  
music using the DIGITAL MEDIA PORT adapter,  
you can enhance the sound.  
Press DECODING MODE repeatedly until “A.F.D.  
STD” appears in the front panel display (page 77) and  
set the sound mode (page 80) to “MOVIE,”  
“MUSIC,” or “NEWS.”  
Each time you press FUNCTION, the  
function changes as follows.  
“BD/DVD” t “TUNER FM” t  
“TUNER AM” t “TV” t “SAT/  
CABLE” t “HDMI1” t “HDMI2” t  
“DMPORT” t …  
To cancel, select other than “A.F.D. STD.”  
• When using the additional surround amplifier  
(optional) with the surround back speakers (optional),  
you can select “PLIIx MOVIE” and “PLIIx MUSIC”  
for the decoding mode (page 77).  
Function  
Source  
If distortion occurs in the sound  
of a connected component  
You can reduce the input level for the connected  
component. For details, see [Attenuate - TV]  
“BD/DVD”  
Disc that is played by the  
system  
“TUNER FM”/  
“TUNER AM”  
FM/AM radio (page 83)  
“TV”  
TV  
“SAT/CABLE”  
Component that is  
connected to the SAT/  
CABLE jacks on the rear  
US  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
Press FUNCTION repeatedly until “BD/  
DVD” appears in the front panel  
display.  
Playback  
5
6
Press A.  
Playing a BD/DVD  
Load a disc.  
Place one disc on the disc tray, and then  
press A.  
Depending on the disc, some operations may be  
different or restricted.  
Refer to the operating instructions supplied with  
your disc.  
"/1  
x FUNCTION  
H
A
FUNCTION  
VOLUME  
Z
When you insert a commercially available  
BD-ROM or DVD VIDEO, playback  
automatically starts depending on the disc.  
HDMI  
S-AIR  
Note  
Disc tray  
VOLUME +/–  
• When you play an 8 cm disc, place it on the  
inner circle of the tray. Be careful that the disc is  
not skewed on the inner circle of the tray.  
• Do not forcibly press the disc tray closed with  
your finger, as this may cause malfunction.  
• Do not place more than one disc on the tray.  
ONE-TOUCH  
PLAY  
"/1  
A
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Number  
buttons  
TIME  
ANGLE  
7
8
Press C/c to select  
[Video].  
SUBTITLE  
Press X/x to select  
, then press H  
SCENE  
SEARCH  
TOP MENU  
C/X/x/c,  
DISPLAY  
POP UP/  
MENU  
or  
.
BD Data  
OPTIONS  
HOME  
./>  
FUNCTION  
Video  
H
/
m/M  
X
MUTING  
x
VOLUME  
+/–  
For commercially available BD-ROM or  
DVD VIDEO, playback starts.  
For a BD or DVD recorded on other  
equipment, the title list appears. Press X/x  
1
2
Turn on your TV.  
Switch the input selector on the TV to  
this system.  
to select  
, then press H or  
.
Playback starts.  
3
Press "/1.  
9
Adjust the volume by using VOLUME  
+/–.  
The system turns on.  
The volume level appears on the TV screen  
and in the front panel display.  
US  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Note  
To  
Press  
• Depending on the system status, the volume level  
may not appear on the TV screen.  
Stop play and remove  
the disc  
A
• When you set the [Control for HDMI] function to  
[On], the TV that is connected to the system with an  
HDMI cable (not supplied) can be sync-operated with  
the system. For details, see “Using the Control for  
Locate a point quickly M or m while playing a  
by playing a disc in fast disc. Each time you press  
forward or fast reverse M or m during scan,  
1)  
(Scan)  
the playback speed changes  
as follows:  
Tip  
• You can change the speed at which the volume is  
turned up and down.  
To turn the volume up/down quickly, press and hold  
the VOLUME +/–.  
To set the volume up/down precisely, press the  
VOLUME +/– briefly.  
Playback direction  
M1 (×10) t M2 (×30)  
t M3 (×120)  
Reverse direction  
n (×1) tm1 (×10) t  
m2 (×30) t m3  
(×120)  
To turn the system off  
Press "/1 while the system is on. The system  
enters standby mode.  
When you press and hold  
the button, fast forward/fast  
reverse continues at the  
selected speed until you  
release the button.  
To save power in standby mode  
Press "/1 while the system is on.  
To return to normal speed,  
press H. Actual speeds  
may differ with some discs.  
To enter power saving mode, make sure that the  
system is in the following status.  
– [Control for HDMI] is set to [Off] (page 95).  
– [S-AIR Standby] is set to [Off] (page 92).  
Replay the previous  
scene  
(instant replay) during  
playback.  
2)  
– [Standby Mode] is set to [Normal]  
Briefly fast forward the  
current scene  
(instant advance)  
during playback.  
3)  
1)Scan speeds may differ with some discs.  
2)BD/DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW/DVD-R only.  
3)BD/DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW/DVD-R/DVD+RW/  
DVD+R only.  
To use the headphones  
Connect the headphones to PHONES jack on the  
surround amplifier. The sound of the system is  
muted. For details, see page “To enjoy the sound  
Note  
• You may not be able to use the instant replay or  
instant advance function with some scenes.  
Other operations  
To  
Press  
x
To play a restricted BD or DVD  
(Parental Control)  
Stop  
Pause  
X
When you play a restricted BD  
Change [BD Parental Control] in [BD/DVD  
Viewing Settings] (page 112).  
Resume play after pause X or H  
Go to the next chapter  
>
Go back to the  
preceding chapter  
. twice in a second.  
When you press . once,  
you can go to the beginning  
of the current chapter.  
When you play a restricted DVD  
Change [DVD Parental Control] in [BD/DVD  
Viewing Settings] (page 112).  
Turn off the sound  
temporarily  
MUTING  
When you play a restricted BD or DVD, the  
display for entering your password appears on  
the screen.  
To cancel, press it again or  
VOLUME + to adjust the  
sound volume.  
US  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Enter your four-digit password using the  
Available OPTIONS  
number buttons, and press  
Playback starts.  
.
1
Press OPTIONS.  
The options menu appears.  
To register or change the password, see  
2
Press X/x to select an item, then press  
.
To play a restricted BD-RE or BD-  
R (Disc Lock)  
The available items differ depending on the  
disc type or system situation.  
When you play a BD-RE or BD-R restricted by  
the Disc Lock function, the display for entering  
your password appears on the screen.  
Items  
Details  
[Video Settings]  
Adjusts settings for picture  
1
Enter the four-digit password that has  
been registered when creating the disc  
using the number buttons, and press  
.
[Title List]  
[Play]  
Displays the title list.  
Plays the title from the  
point where you pressed x.  
[Play from Beginning] Plays the title from the  
beginning.  
2
Select a title, and press H or  
.
Playback starts.  
[Top Menu]  
Displays the disc’s Top  
One-Touch Play (for HDMI  
connection only)  
Press ONE-TOUCH PLAY.  
The system and the connected TV turn on and  
the input selector on the TV is switched to the  
system, then you can enjoy the contents of a  
disc.  
[Menu/Popup Menu]  
Displays the BD-ROM’s  
Pop-up Menu or DVD’s  
[Stop]  
Stops playback.  
[Title Search]  
Searches for a title and  
starts playback from the  
beginning (page 70).  
Note  
[Chapter Search]  
Searches for a chapter and  
starts playback from the  
beginning (page 70).  
• When using the HDMI connection, there may be a  
delay before the playback picture appears on the  
screen, and the beginning portion of the playback  
picture may not be displayed.  
• To use the this function, set [Control for HDMI] to  
US  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the angles  
Resuming playback from the  
point where you stopped the  
disc  
If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are  
recorded on a disc, you can change the viewing  
angle.  
(Resume Play)  
Press ANGLE during playback to select the  
desired angle.  
When you stop the disc, the system remembers  
the point where you pressed x. As long as you  
do not remove the disc, Resume Play will work  
even if the system is set to standby mode by  
pressing "/1.  
Note  
• Depending on the disc, you may not be able to change  
the angle even if multi-angles are recorded on the  
disc.  
1
2
While playing a disc, press x to stop  
playback.  
Press X/x to select  
or  
, then press H  
Displaying the subtitles  
.
The system starts playback from the point  
where you stopped the disc in Step 1.  
If subtitles are recorded on a disc, you can turn  
the subtitles on/off during playback. If  
multilingual subtitles are recorded on the disc,  
you can change the subtitle language during  
playback, or turn the subtitles on/off whenever  
you want.  
Note  
• Depending on where you stop the disc, the system  
may not resume playback from exactly the same  
point.  
• The point where you stopped playing may be cleared  
when:  
– you open the disc tray.  
Press SUBTITLE during playback to select  
the desired subtitle language.  
– you play another title.  
– you change the settings on the system.  
– you disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead).  
– you remove the external memory (for BD-ROMs).  
• This function may not work properly with some  
discs.  
Note  
• Depending on the disc, you may not be able to change  
the subtitles even if multilingual subtitles are  
recorded on the disc. You also may not be able to turn  
them off.  
To play from the beginning of the  
title  
Press OPTIONS to select [Play from beginning],  
then press  
. Playback starts from the  
beginning of the title.  
US  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using the BD’s or DVD’s menu  
Enjoying BonusView  
Some BD-ROMs have bonus contents and other  
data that can be downloaded to the external  
memory (local storage) for enjoyment.  
To display Top Menu  
A BD/DVD is divided into a lot of sections,  
which make up a picture or music feature. These  
sections are called “titles.” When you play a BD/  
DVD which contains several titles, you can  
select the title you want using Top Menu.  
You can also select items such as the language  
for the subtitles and the language for the sound  
using Top Menu.  
1
2
Press "/1 to turn the system off.  
Insert the external memory (not  
supplied) into the EXTERNAL slot on  
the rear of the unit.  
The external memory is used as the local  
storage.  
1
Press TOP MENU.  
Make sure that the external memory is  
properly inserted into the unit (page 55).  
The disc’s menu appears on the TV screen.  
The contents of the menu vary depending  
on the disc.  
3
4
Press "/1 to turn the system on.  
Insert a BD-ROM with BonusView.  
2
3
Press C/X/x/c or the number buttons to  
select the item you want to play or  
change.  
The operation method differs depending on  
the disc. Refer to the operating instructions  
supplied with the disc.  
Press  
.
To display Pop-up Menus  
Some BD-ROMs contain Pop-up Menus that  
appear without interrupting playback.  
To delete data in the external  
memory  
You can delete all unnecessary data at once.  
1
2
Press POP UP/MENU during playback.  
1
2
3
Press HOME.  
The Pop-up Menu appears.  
Press C/c to select  
[Video].  
Press C/X/x/c, the color buttons, or  
number buttons to select the item, and  
follow the on-screen instructions.  
Press X/x to select [BD Data], then  
press OPTIONS.  
4
5
Select [Erase], then press  
Select [OK], then press  
.
.
US  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Searching for a scene quickly  
Searching for a Title/Chapter  
(Scene Search)  
You can search for a chapter if the title contains  
chapter marks.  
You can move quickly between scenes within  
the title currently being played back.  
1
Press OPTIONS during playback or in  
pause mode.  
1
Press SCENE SEARCH during  
playback or in pause mode.  
The options menu appears.  
Playback pauses and a bar with a scene  
indicator (square-shaped – indicates the  
current point) appears at the bottom of the  
screen.  
2
Press X/x to a search method, then  
press  
.
• [Title Search] (for a BD-ROM/DVD  
VIDEO): Searches the desired title.  
• [Chapter Search]: Searches the desired  
chapter.  
2
Press and hold C/c or m/M to move  
the scene indicator to the scene you  
are searching for.  
The display for entering the number  
appears.  
Scene indicator  
Example: Chapter Search  
Chapter :  
Scene Search  
The current point  
The scene indicator on the bar is displayed  
around the playing point.  
3
4
Press the number buttons to enter the  
number of the title or chapter.  
3
4
Release the button at the point you  
want to watch.  
If you make a mistake, press CLEAR, and  
re-enter another number.  
The scene at which you released the button  
is displayed in pause mode.  
Press  
.
After a while, the system starts playback  
from the selected number.  
To search for a scene again, move the scene  
indicator using C/c or m/M.  
To cancel [Title Search]/[Chapter  
Search]  
Press SCENE SEARCH,  
, H, or X.  
Playback starts.  
Press RETURN.  
To cancel Scene Search mode  
Press SCENE SEARCH, , H, or X.  
Playback starts from the point you pressed the  
button.  
Note  
• The Scene Search function is available for titles  
longer than 100 seconds and shorter than 100 hours.  
• Depending on the disc, this function may not work.  
US  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To view the playing time and  
remaining time in the front panel  
display  
Displaying the playing time  
and play information  
Press TIME repeatedly.  
Each time you press TIME while playing the  
disc, the display changes:  
1 y 2  
You can check the title information, including  
the video transmission rate, etc.  
Press  
DISPLAY during playback.  
1 Playing time of the current title  
2 Remaining time of the current title  
The displayed information differs depending on  
the disc type and system status.  
Some displayed items may disappear after a few  
seconds.  
Example: When playing a BD-ROM  
Angle  
English Dolby Digital Plus  
Mbps  
A
B
C
D
The current selected angle  
Title number or name  
The currently selected audio or subtitle setting  
Available functions (  
subtitle)  
angle/  
audio/  
E
Playback information  
Displays Disc type/Play mode/Video codec/  
Bit rate/Playing status bar/Playing time  
(Remaining time*)  
F
Output resolution/Video frequency  
* Displayed when you press TIME repeatedly.  
Tip  
• You can also check the playback information in the  
front panel display.  
• Press SUBTITLE, AUDIO, or ANGLE, and you can  
check each type of information.  
US  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
Adjusting pictures for videos  
• Set the picture setting of your TV to [Standard] before  
changing [Picture Quality Mode].  
• [Video Settings] is not available when the connected  
TV is set to Theater Mode (page 96).  
• Depending on the disc or the scene being played,  
[FNR], [BNR], or [MNR] effects may be hard to  
discern.  
1
Press OPTIONS during playback.  
The options menu appears.  
2
Press X/x to select [Video Settings],  
then press  
.
The [Video Settings] screen appears.  
Video Settings  
Select the item you want to change.  
Close  
Picture Quality Mode Standard  
FNR  
BNR  
MNR  
Standard  
3
Press X/x to select an item, then press  
.
[Picture Quality Mode]  
Optimizes the picture settings for different  
lighting environments.  
• [Standard]  
• [Brighter Room]  
• [Theater Room]  
[FNR]  
Reduces random noise appearing in the  
picture.  
• [Off]  
• [Auto]  
[BNR]  
Reduces mosaic-like block noise in the  
picture.  
• [Off]  
• [Auto]  
[MNR]  
Reduces minor noise around the picture  
outlines (mosquito noise).  
• [Off]  
• [Auto]  
4
Press C/X/x/c to select or adjust the  
settings, then press  
.
To adjust any other items, repeat steps 3 and  
4.  
US  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting the delay between  
the picture and sound  
(A/V SYNC)  
Playing a CD  
When the sound does not match the pictures on  
the TV screen, you can adjust the delay between  
the picture and sound.  
A
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
Press A/V SYNC.  
TIME  
“A/V SYNC” appears in the front panel  
display.  
2
Press X/x to adjust the delay between  
the picture and sound.  
C/X/x/c,  
HOME  
OPTIONS  
You can adjust from 0 ms to 300 ms in 25  
ms increments.  
FUNCTION  
./>  
m/M  
H
Note  
• Depending on the input stream, A/V SYNC may not  
be effective.  
X
MUTING  
x
VOLUME  
+/–  
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly until “BD/  
DVD” appears in the front panel  
display.  
2
3
Load a CD.  
The Music Player screen appears.  
Press H.  
Playback starts.  
Music CD  
Stereo  
Current track number and elapsed time  
4
Adjust the volume by using VOLUME  
+/–.  
The volume level appears on the TV screen  
and in the front panel display.  
US  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To select a track  
Available OPTIONS  
1
2
Press HOME.  
1
Press OPTIONS.  
The options menu appears.  
Press C/c to select  
[Music].  
2
Press X/x to select an item, then press  
.
The available items differ depending on the  
disc type or system situation.  
Music  
Music CD  
Items  
Details  
[Play]  
Plays the selected track.  
[Play from beginning] Plays the current track from  
(during playback) the beginning.  
[Play from beginning] Plays the selected track  
3
4
Press  
The music list appears.  
Press X/x to select a track, then press  
H or  
The system plays the selected track.  
.
(in stop mode)  
from the beginning.  
[Stop]  
Stops playback.  
.
Note  
• The point where you stopped playing (resume point)  
is cleared from memory when:  
Other operations  
– You open the disc tray.  
– You turn the system off.  
To  
Press  
Stop  
Pause  
x
X
To view the playing time and  
remaining time in the front panel  
display  
Resume play after pause X or H  
Start playback from the  
point where you pressed  
x.  
H
Press TIME repeatedly.  
Each time you press TIME while playing the  
disc, the display changes:  
Go to the next track  
>
1 t 2 t 3 t 4 t 1 t ...  
Go back to the  
preceding track  
. twice in a second.  
When you press . once,  
you can go to the beginning  
of the current track.  
1 Playing time of the current track  
2 Remaining time of the current track  
3 Playing time of the disc  
Turn off the sound  
temporarily  
MUTING.  
4 Remaining time of the disc  
To cancel, press it again or  
VOLUME + to adjust the  
sound volume.  
Stop play and remove  
the disc  
A
Fast reverse/fast  
forwards  
m or M during  
playback.  
US  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
6
Press X/x to select  
, then press  
.
The file list or folder list appears.  
Playing Photo Files  
1)  
2)  
3)  
Photo  
1)BD-REs/BD-Rs containing JPEG image files  
2)DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs  
containing JPEG image files  
3)CD-RWs/CD-Rs containing JPEG image files  
Thumbnails of files*  
* Appears only when the file has thumbnail  
information.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Press X/x to select a file or folder, then  
press  
.
DISPLAY  
When you select a folder, press X/x to  
select a file in the folder, then press  
The selected photo file is displayed.  
.
C/X/x/c,  
HOME  
OPTIONS  
Other operations  
FUNCTION  
./>  
H
To  
Press  
Play a slideshow  
Stop a slideshow  
Pause a slideshow  
Go to the next photo  
H
x
X
x
X
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly until “BD/  
DVD” appears in the front panel  
display.  
>
.
Go back to the  
preceding photo  
Display the file  
information  
DISPLAY  
2
3
4
Load a disc that contains photo files.  
Press HOME.  
Available OPTIONS for photo files  
Press C/c to select  
[Photo].  
1
Press OPTIONS.  
The options menu appears.  
2
Press X/x to select an item, then press  
Photo  
Data CD  
.
The available items differ depending on the  
situation.  
Items  
Details  
1)2)  
[Slideshow Speed]  
Changes the slideshow  
speed.  
• [Fast]  
• [Normal]  
• [Slow]  
1)  
[Stop]  
Stops a slideshow.  
US  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To view best quality images  
Items  
Details  
1)  
If you have a Sony TV compatible with  
“PhotoTV HD,” you can enjoy best quality  
images by the following connection and setting.  
[Rotate Left]  
Rotates the photo  
counterclockwise by 90  
degrees.  
1)  
[Rotate Right]  
Rotates the photo  
clockwise by 90 degrees.  
1
2
Connect the unit to the TV using an  
HDMI cable (not supplied).  
2)  
[ViewImage]  
Displays the selected  
picture.  
Set the TV’s video setting to [VIDEO-A]  
mode.  
2)  
[Slideshow]  
Starts a slideshow.  
For details on [VIDEO-A], refer to the  
operating instructions supplied with the  
TV.  
1)Appears when you press OPTIONS during playback  
of photo files.  
2)Appears when you press OPTIONS while the file/  
folder list is displayed.  
Note  
• When you attempt to play the following photo files,  
the  
mark appears on the screen and they cannot  
be played.  
– Photo files larger than 8,192 pixels (width or  
height)  
– Photo files smaller than 15 pixels (width or height)  
– Photo files exceeding 32 MB  
– Photo files with extreme aspect ratios (greater than  
50:1 or 1:50)  
– Photo files in Progressive JPEG format  
– Photo files that have a “.jpeg” or “.jpg” extension,  
but not in JPEG format  
– Photo files that have an extremely long name  
• The following photo files cannot be played.  
– Photo files recorded on BD-Rs in any format other  
than UDF (Universal Disk Format) 2.6  
– Photo files recorded on BD-REs in any format  
other than UDF (Universal Disk Format) 2.5  
• The following photo files or folders cannot be  
displayed in the file list or folder list.  
– Photo files that have an extension other than  
“.jpeg” or “.jpg”  
– Photo files that have an extremely long name  
– Photo files in the 5th tree or lower  
– 501th or more folders when the total number of  
folders and files in a single tree exceeds 500  
• Photo files edited on a PC may not be played.  
• Thumbnail images of some photo files may not be  
displayed.  
• Large photo files may take some time to display or to  
start a slideshow.  
US  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sound Adjustment  
Enjoying Surround Sound  
You can enjoy surround sound simply by selecting one of the system’s pre-programmed decoding  
modes. They bring exciting and powerful sound of movie theaters into your home.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
DECODING  
MODE  
With the cover opened.  
Press DECODING MODE repeatedly until the desired decoding mode appears in the front  
panel display.  
Display  
Decoding mode  
Effect  
“A.F.D. STD”  
AUTO FORMAT  
DIRECT  
Presents sound as it was recorded/encoded.  
Depending on the source, the speakers that output sound will vary.  
STANDARD  
“A.F.D. MULTI”  
AUTO FORMAT  
DIRECT MULTI  
2 channel source: Sound that is recorded in 2 channel (front left and  
right channel) is also assigned to the surround left and right channel.  
This mode outputs sound from the front left and right speakers,  
surround left and right speakers, and subwoofer. The center speaker  
does not output any sound.  
Multi channel source: Depending on the source, speakers that output  
the sound will vary.  
“PRO LOGIC”  
“PLII MOVIE”  
Dolby Pro Logic  
Performs Pro Logic decoding to the input signal and simulates  
surround sound from 2 channel sources.  
This mode outputs sound from all the speakers and subwoofer. Sound  
may not be output from all speakers depending on the source.  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
MOVIE  
Performs Pro Logic II movie mode decoding to the input signal and  
produces five full-bandwidth output channels from 2 channel sources.  
This setting is ideal for watching videos of overdubbed or old movies.  
This mode outputs sound from all the speakers and subwoofer. Sound  
may not be output from all speakers depending on the source.  
US  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Display  
Decoding mode  
Effect  
“PLII MUSIC”  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
MUSIC  
Performs Pro Logic II music mode decoding to the input signal and  
produces five full-bandwidth output channels from 2 channel sources.  
This setting is ideal for normal stereo sources such as a CD.  
This mode outputs sound from all the speakers and subwoofer. Sound  
may not be output from all speakers depending on the source.  
1)  
“PLIIx MOVIE”  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Performs Pro Logic IIx movie mode decoding to the input signal and  
MOVIE  
produces 7.1 output channels. This setting is ideal for watching videos  
of overdubbed or old movies.  
Sound may not be output from all speakers depending on the source.  
1)  
“PLIIx MUSIC”  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Performs Pro Logic IIx music mode decoding to the input signal and  
MUSIC  
produces 7.1 output channels. This setting is ideal for normal stereo  
sources such as a CD.  
Sound may not be output from all speakers depending on the source.  
“NEO:6 CINEMA” dts NEO:6 Cinema  
Performs the DTS Neo:6 Cinema mode decoding to the input signal  
and produces 6.1 output channels. This setting is ideal for watching  
videos of overdubbed or old movies.  
This mode outputs sound from all the speakers and subwoofer. Sound  
may not be output from all speakers depending on the source.  
“NEO:6 MUSIC”  
“2CH STEREO”  
dts NEO:6 Music  
Performs the DTS Neo:6 Music mode decoding to the input signal and  
produces 6.1 output channels. This setting is ideal for normal stereo  
sources such as a CD.  
This mode outputs sound from all the speakers and subwoofer. Sound  
may not be output from all speakers depending on the source.  
2 CHANNEL  
STEREO  
Outputs the sound from the front left and right speakers and  
subwoofer. Multi channel surround formats are downmixed to 2  
channels.  
2)3)  
“HP THEATER”  
HEADPHONE  
THEATER  
Outputs the sound as surround from headphone left and right.  
2)  
“HP 2CH”  
HEADPHONE 2  
Outputs the sound from headphone left and right. Multi channel  
CHANNEL STEREO surround formats are downmixed to 2 channels.  
1)Appears only when you use the additional surround amplifier (optional) with the surround back speakers (optional)  
2)Appears only when you connect headphones to the surround amplifier (page 58).  
3)BDV-IT1000ES only. DCS technology (page 80) is used.  
To turn the surround effect off  
Press DECODING MODE repeatedly until “A.F.D. STD” or “2CH STEREO” appears in the front  
panel display and set the sound mode (page 80) to “MOVIE” or “MUSIC.”  
Note  
• When you select “A.F.D. MULTI,” depending on the disc or source, the beginning of the sound may be cut off as  
the optimum mode is automatically selected. To avoid cutting the sound, select “A.F.D. STD.”  
• When the input signal is multi channel source, “PRO LOGIC,” “PLII MOVIE,” “PLII MUSIC,” “NEO:6  
CINEMA,” and “NEO:6 MUSIC” are canceled and the multi channel source is output directly.  
• When the bilingual broadcast sound is input, “PRO LOGIC,” “PLII MOVIE,” and “PLII MUSIC” are not effective.  
US  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• “PRO LOGIC,” “PLII MOVIE,” “PLII MUSIC,” “PLIIx MOVIE,” “PLIIx MUSIC,” “NEO:6 CINEMA,” and  
“NEO:6 MUSIC” are canceled when you set the sound mode (page 80) to the following setting.  
– “SPORTS”  
– “OMNI-DIR”  
– “MOVIE-D.C.S.-” (BDV-IT1000ES only)  
• Depending on the input stream, the decoding mode may not be effective. To activate the decoding mode, set [Fs  
Limit] in [Audio Settings] (page 111) to [On].  
• When changing the decoding mode while using the S-AIR receiver, sound from the S-AIR receiver may skip.  
Tip  
• The system memorizes the last decoding mode selected for each function mode.  
Whenever you select a function such as “BD/DVD” or “TUNER FM,” the decoding mode that was last applied to  
the function is automatically applied again when it is returned to. For example, if you listen to “BD/DVD” with  
“PRO LOGIC” as the decoding mode, then change to another function, and then return to “BD/DVD,” “PRO  
LOGIC” will be applied again.  
US  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note  
• When you connect headphones to the surround  
amplifier, SOUND MODE does not work.  
• Depending on the disc or source, when you select  
“AUTO,” the beginning of the sound may be cut off  
as the system selects the optimum mode  
automatically. To avoid cutting the sound, select  
other than “AUTO.”  
Selecting the Sound  
Mode  
You can select a suitable sound mode for movies  
or music.  
• Depending on the input stream, the sound mode may  
not be effective.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
• When changing the sound mode while using the  
S-AIR receiver, sound from the S-AIR receiver may  
skip.  
Enjoying Digital Cinema Sound  
(BDV-IT1000ES only)  
SOUND  
MODE  
About DCS (Digital Cinema  
Sound)  
In collaboration with Sony Pictures  
Entertainment, Sony measured the sound  
environment of their studios and integrated the  
data of the measurement and the Sony DSP  
(Digital Signal Processor) technology to  
develop “Digital Cinema Sound.” “Digital  
Cinema Sound” simulates in a home theater an  
ideal movie theater sound environment based on  
the preference of the movie director.  
Press SOUND MODE repeatedly during  
playback until the desired mode appears in  
the front panel display.  
• “AUTO”: The system selects “MOVIE” or  
“MUSIC” automatically to produce the sound  
effect depending on the disc or sound stream.  
• “MOVIE”: The system provides the sound for  
movies.  
About “MOVIE-D.C.S.-”  
“MOVIE-D.C.S.-” is ideal for enjoying movie  
software encoded with multi channel format,  
such as the Dolby Digital DVD. This mode  
reproduces the sound characteristics of Sony  
Pictures Entertainment’s studios.  
• “MUSIC”: The system provides the sound for  
music.  
• “SPORTS”: The system adds reverberation for  
the sports program.  
“MOVIE-D.C.S.-” consists of the following  
three elements.  
• “NEWS”: The system provides the sound for  
the voice program, such as news.  
• “OMNI-DIR”: The system outputs the same  
sound from all speakers; the same sound is  
audible anywhere in the room. Multi channel  
surround formats are downmixed to two  
channels.  
• Virtual Multi Dimension  
The system creates five sets of virtual speakers  
surrounding the listener from a single pair of  
actual surround speakers.  
• Screen Depth Matching  
In a movie theater, sound seems to come from  
inside the image reflected on the movie screen.  
This element creates the same sensation in  
your listening room by shifting the sound of  
the front speakers “into” the screen.  
• Cinema Studio Reverberation  
• “MOVIE-D.C.S.-”*: The system reproduces  
the sound characteristics of the Sony Pictures  
Entertainment “Cary Grant Theater” cinema  
production studio.  
* BDV-IT1000ES only. DCS technology is used.  
The system reproduces the reverberations  
US  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
peculiar to a movie theater.  
Changing the Sound  
“MOVIE-D.C.S.-” is the integrated mode which  
operates these elements simultaneously.  
Note  
• The virtual speaker effect may cause increased noise  
in the playback signal.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
• With decoding modes that use virtual speakers, you  
will not be able to hear any sound coming directly  
from the surround speakers.  
AUDIO  
Selecting the audio format,  
multilingual tracks, or channel  
When the system is playing a BD/DVD VIDEO  
recorded in multiple audio formats (PCM,  
Dolby Digital, MPEG audio, or DTS), you can  
change the audio format. If the BD/DVD  
VIDEO is recorded with multilingual tracks,  
you can also change the language.  
With a CD, you can select the sound from the  
right or left channel and listen to the sound of the  
selected channel through both the right and left  
speakers.  
Press AUDIO repeatedly during playback to  
select the desired audio signal.  
The audio information appears on the TV  
screen.  
x BD/DVD VIDEO  
Depending on the BD/DVD VIDEO, the choice  
of language varies.  
When 4 digits are displayed, they indicate a  
(page 139) to confirm which language the code  
represents. When the same language is  
displayed two or more times, the BD/DVD  
VIDEO is recorded in multiple audio formats.  
US  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
x DVD-VR  
The types of sound tracks recorded on a disc are  
displayed.  
Example:  
Enjoying multiplex broadcast  
Sound  
(DUAL MONO)  
• [ Stereo]  
• [ Stereo (Audio1)]  
• [ Stereo (Audio2)]  
• [ Main]  
You can enjoy multiplex broadcast sound when  
the system receives or plays the Dolby Digital  
multiplex broadcast signal.  
• [ Sub]  
• [ Main/Sub]  
Note  
• To receive the Dolby Digital signal, you need to  
connect a TV or other component to the unit with an  
optical or coaxial digital cord (page 48) and set the  
digital output mode of the TV or other component to  
Dolby Digital.  
Note  
• [ Stereo (Audio1)] and [ Stereo (Audio2)] do not  
appear when one audio stream is recorded on the disc.  
x CD  
• [ Stereo]: The standard stereo sound.  
• [ 1/L]: The sound of the left channel  
(monaural).  
Press AUDIO repeatedly until the desired  
signal appears in the front panel display.  
• “MAIN”: Sound of the main language will be  
output.  
• “SUB”: Sound of the sub language will be  
output.  
• [ 2/R]: The sound of the right channel  
(monaural).  
• “MAIN/SUB”: Mixed sound of both the main  
and sub languages will be output.  
US  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1
2
Press FUNCTION repeatedly until  
“TUNER FM” or “TUNER AM” appears  
in the front panel display.  
Tuner  
Select the radio station.  
Listening to the Radio  
Automatic tuning  
You can enjoy radio sound with the system’s  
speakers.  
Press and hold TUNING +/– until the auto  
scanning starts.  
[Auto Tuning] appears on the TV screen.  
Scanning stops when the system tunes in a  
station.  
"/1  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Number  
buttons  
To stop the automatic tuning manually,  
press TUNING +/– or x.  
Color  
CLEAR  
buttons  
(RED/  
GREEN/  
BLUE/  
YELLOW)  
“TUNED” and “ST” (for stereo program)  
light up in the front panel display.  
C/X/x/c,  
Manual tuning  
RETURN  
HOME  
Press TUNING +/– repeatedly.  
OPTIONS  
3
Adjust the volume by pressing  
VOLUME +/–.  
FUNCTION  
PRESET +/–  
TUNING +/–  
To turn off the radio  
x
VOLUME  
+/–  
TUNER  
MENU  
Press "/1.  
DIRECT  
TUNING  
To change the AM tuning interval  
(except for CIS and Middle  
Eastern models)  
DISPLAY  
With the cover opened.  
You can operate the tuner function by observing  
the following display on the TV screen.  
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly until  
“TUNER AM” appears in the front panel  
display.  
Current station  
2
Press and hold H and FUNCTION on  
the unit until “AM 9k STEP” or “AM 10k  
STEP” appears in the front panel  
display.  
Current band and preset number  
FM  
7
Tip  
88.00 MHz  
• To improve reception, reorient the connected  
antennas (aerials).  
SONY RADIO  
Station name  
Tip  
• You can operate the tuner function using the tuner  
menu on the front panel display. See “Operating the  
US  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Presetting radio stations  
Selecting the radio station by  
inputting the frequencies  
directly  
You can preset 20 FM stations, and 10 AM  
stations. Before tuning, make sure to turn down  
the volume to minimum.  
When you know the frequencies, you can select  
the radio station by inputting the frequencies  
directly.  
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly until  
“TUNER FM” or “TUNER AM” appears  
in the front panel display.  
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly until  
“TUNER FM” or “TUNER AM” appears  
in the front panel display.  
2
Press and hold TUNING +/– until the  
auto scanning starts.  
[Auto Tuning] appears on the TV screen.  
Scanning stops when the system tunes in a  
station.  
2
Press OPTIONS.  
The options menu appears.  
“TUNED” and “ST” (for stereo program)  
light up in the front panel display.  
3
4
5
Press X/x to select [Direct Tuning],  
then press  
.
3
Press OPTIONS.  
Press the number buttons to select the  
frequencies.  
The options menu appears.  
Press  
.
4
5
6
Press X/x to select [Preset Memory],  
then press  
.
The setting is made.  
Press X/x to select the preset number  
you want.  
If an FM program is noisy  
Press  
.
The setting is made.  
If an FM program is noisy, you can select  
monaural reception. There will be no stereo  
effect, but reception will improve.  
To change the preset number  
Select the desired preset number by pressing  
PRESET +/–, then perform the procedure from  
Step 3.  
1
Press OPTIONS.  
The options menu appears.  
2
3
Press X/x to select [FM Mode], then  
press  
.
Selecting the preset station  
Press X/x to select [Monaural].  
• [Stereo]: Stereo reception.  
• [Monaural]: Monaural reception.  
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly until  
“TUNER FM” or “TUNER AM” appears  
in the front panel display.  
4
Press  
.
The last received station is tuned in.  
The setting is made.  
2
Press PRESET +/– repeatedly to select  
the preset station.  
The preset number and frequency appear on  
the TV screen and front panel display.  
Each time you press the button, the system  
tunes in one preset station.  
Tip  
• You can select the preset station number directly  
by pressing the number buttons.  
US  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Buttons  
Details  
Naming preset stations  
RED  
[Letter Type]  
Switches the keyboard between  
alphabet and numbers.  
You can enter a name for preset stations. These  
names (for example, “XYZ”) appear in the front  
panel display when a station is selected.  
Only one name can be entered for each preset  
station.  
GREEN  
[A/a]  
Switches the keyboard between  
upper case and lower case.  
BLUE  
[Symbol]  
Displays the keyboard for  
symbols.  
YELLOW  
[Finish]  
The input is entered, and the  
system returns to the previous  
display.  
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly until  
“TUNER FM” or “TUNER AM” appears  
in the front panel display.  
CLEAR  
Erases the character to the right  
The last received station is tuned in.  
[Clear]/[Clear All] of the cursor.  
To erase all displayed characters,  
2
Press PRESET +/– repeatedly to select  
the preset station you want to create an  
index name for.  
press and hold CLEAR for 2  
seconds or more.  
RETURN  
[Cancel]  
Returns to the previous display,  
canceling the input.  
3
4
Press OPTIONS.  
The options menu appears.  
C/X/x/c,  
• Select an input function using  
C/X/x/c, and press  
.
Press X/x to select [Preset Name  
• Enter characters as follows:  
1Select a character selection  
panel using C/X/x/c, and press  
. 2Select a character using  
Input], then press  
.
The display for entering characters appears.  
To enter characters, see the following Steps.  
C/c, and press  
.
To enter characters  
Input FM preset name.  
Clear  
Available OPTIONS for the  
Radio  
Clear All  
Space 0  
Cancel  
Finish  
1
Press OPTIONS.  
Letter Type  
Symbol  
The options menu appears.  
2
Press X/x to select an item, then press  
.
1
Press the number button repeatedly to  
select a character.  
The available items differ depending on the  
situation.  
Example:  
Press the number 3 button once to enter [D].  
Press the number 3 button three times to  
enter [F].  
Items  
Details  
[Preset Memory] Preset 20 FM stations, 10 AM  
stations.  
2
3
Press c, and enter the next character.  
[Direct Tuning]  
Input station frequency directly.  
Enter a name for a preset station.  
Press YELLOW ([Finish]) to finish.  
[Preset Name  
Input]  
You can use the following buttons to enter  
characters.  
[FM Mode]  
Select monaural or stereo  
reception of FM programs.  
US  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
7
Press X/x to select the preset number  
you want.  
Viewing the station name or  
frequency in the front panel  
display  
TUNED  
ST  
Tip  
When the system is set to “TUNER FM” or  
“TUNER AM,” you can check the frequency  
using the front panel display.  
• You can select the preset number directly by  
pressing the number buttons.  
Press  
.
Press DISPLAY.  
“COMPLETE!” appears in the front panel  
display, and the station is stored.  
Each time you press DISPLAY on the remote,  
the display changes as shown.  
1 Station name*  
2 Frequency**  
* This is displayed if you have entered a name for a  
8
9
Repeat Steps 2 to 7 to store other  
stations.  
Press TUNER MENU.  
preset station.  
The system menu turns off.  
**Returns to the original display when several seconds  
has elapsed.  
To change the preset number  
Select the desired preset number by pressing  
PRESET +/–, then perform the procedure from  
Step 3.  
Operating the tuner function  
using the tuner menu  
To listen to radio stations when  
you know the frequencies  
You can operate the tuner function using the  
tuner menu on the front panel display.  
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly until  
“TUNER FM” or “TUNER AM” appears  
in the front panel display.  
To preset radio stations  
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly until  
“TUNER FM” or “TUNER AM” appears  
in the front panel display.  
2
3
Press DIRECT TUNING.  
Press the number buttons to select the  
frequencies.  
2
Press and hold TUNING +/– until the  
auto scanning starts.  
4
Press  
.
Scanning stops when the system tunes in a  
station. “TUNED” and “ST” (for stereo  
program) light up in the front panel display.  
Tip  
• To improve reception, reorient the connected  
antennas (aerials).  
3
4
Press TUNER MENU.  
If an FM program is noisy  
Press X/x repeatedly until  
“MEMORY?” appears in the front panel  
display.  
If an FM program is noisy, you can select  
monaural reception. There will be no stereo  
effect, but reception will improve.  
5
Press  
or c.  
1
2
Press TUNER MENU.  
A preset number appears in the front panel  
display.  
Press X/x repeatedly until “FM  
MODE?” appears in the front panel  
display.  
TUNED  
ST  
TUNED  
ST  
3
Press  
or c.  
US  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
Press X/x to select “MONO.”  
• “STEREO”: Stereo reception.  
• “MONO”: Monaural reception.  
7
8
Press  
.
“COMPLETE!” appears in the front panel  
display, and the station name is stored.  
Press TUNER MENU.  
5
6
Press  
.
The system menu turns off.  
The setting is made.  
Press TUNER MENU.  
The system menu turns off.  
To name preset stations  
You can enter a name for preset stations. These  
names (for example, “ABC”) appear in the front  
panel display when a station is selected.  
Only one name can be entered for each preset  
station.  
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly until  
“TUNER FM” or “TUNER AM” appears  
in the front panel display.  
The last received station is tuned in.  
2
Press PRESET +/– repeatedly to select  
the preset station you want to create an  
index name for.  
3
4
Press TUNER MENU.  
Press X/x repeatedly until “NAME IN?”  
appears in the front panel display.  
TUNED  
ST  
5
6
Press  
or c.  
Create a name by using C/X/x/c.  
Press X/x to select a character, then press c  
to move the cursor to the next position.  
TUNED  
ST  
You can input letters, numbers, and other  
symbols for a radio station.  
If you make a mistake  
Press C/c repeatedly until the character to  
be changed flashes, then press X/x to select  
the desired character.  
To erase the character, press C/c  
repeatedly until the character to be erased  
flashes, then press CLEAR.  
US  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing the connected  
component on the system  
External Audio Device  
Using the DIGITAL MEDIA  
PORT Adapter  
1
Press FUNCTION repeatedly until  
“DMPORT” appears in the front panel  
display.  
The DIGITAL MEDIA PORT (DMPORT)  
adapter (not supplied) is for enjoying sound  
from a portable audio source or computer. By  
connecting a DIGITAL MEDIA PORT adapter,  
you can enjoy sound from the connected  
component on the system.  
Available DIGITAL MEDIA PORT adapters  
vary in each area.  
For details on connecting the DIGITAL MEDIA  
2
Start playback of the connected  
component.  
The sound and images from the connected  
component are played on the system or  
connected TV.  
For operation details, refer to the operating  
instructions of the DIGITAL MEDIA  
PORT adapter.  
Tip  
• When listening to MP3 files or other compressed  
music using a portable audio source, you can enhance  
the sound. Select “A.F.D. STD” for the decoding  
mode (page 77) and set the sound mode (page 80) to  
“MOVIE,” “MUSIC,” or “NEWS.” To cancel, select  
other than “A.F.D. STD.”  
Note  
• Do not connect an adapter other than the DIGITAL  
MEDIA PORT adapter.  
• Do not connect or disconnect the DIGITAL MEDIA  
PORT adapter to/from the unit while the system is  
turned on.  
• Depending on the type of DIGITAL MEDIA PORT  
adapter, you may be able to operate a connected  
component using either the buttons on the remote or  
the unit. The following illustration shows an example  
of buttons that can be used in this case.  
• Depending on the type of DIGITAL MEDIA PORT  
adapter, the images are also output (page 52).  
• When you use the system and the Bluetooth Wireless  
Audio Adapter (such as TDM-BT1, not supplied) at  
the same time, transmission distance between the  
Bluetooth transmitter and Bluetooth Wireless Audio  
Adapter may be reduced. In this case, place the  
Bluetooth transmitter as far as possible from the  
system, or move the Bluetooth Wireless Audio  
Adapter closer to the Bluetooth transmitter.  
• When you use the system and the Wireless Network  
Audio Adapter (such as TDM-NC1, not supplied) at  
the same time, place the Wireless Network Audio  
Adapter as far as possible from the system.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
FUNCTION  
./>  
H
X
x
US  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Establishing sound  
transmission between the unit  
and S-AIR sub unit  
(ID setting)  
Using an S-AIR Product  
The unit is compatible with the S-AIR function  
(page 153), which allows sound transmission  
between S-AIR products.  
For the surround amplifier  
For the S-AIR receiver  
About S-AIR products  
There are two types of S-AIR product.  
• S-AIR main unit (this unit): This is for  
transmitting sound. You can use up to three  
S-AIR main unit. (The number of usable  
S-AIR main unit depends on the use  
environment.)  
Simply by matching the ID of the unit and the  
S-AIR sub unit, you can establish sound  
transmission.  
To set the ID of the unit  
• S-AIR sub unit: This is for receiving sound.  
1
Press "/1.  
Surround amplifier: You can enjoy  
surround speaker sound wirelessly.  
The system turns on.  
2
Press HOME.  
S-AIR receiver: You can enjoy system  
sound in another room.  
The home menu appears on the TV screen.  
3
4
Press C/c to select  
Press X/x to select [System Settings],  
then press  
Press X/x to select [S-AIR ID], then  
press  
Press X/x to select the desired ID, then  
press  
[Setup].  
Room A  
S-AIR main unit  
HDMI  
S-AIR  
.
5
6
.
.
You can select any ID (A, B, or C).  
The confirmation display appears, then  
disappears automatically.  
S-AIR sub unit  
(surround amplifier)  
Room B  
7
Set the S-AIR sub unit to the same ID.  
Sound transmission is established as  
follows (example):  
S-AIR sub unit  
(S-AIR receiver)  
(not supplied)  
S-AIR main unit  
(This unit)  
ID A  
HDMI  
S-AIR  
Note  
• You cannot operate this function if you do not insert  
the wireless transceiver in the unit correctly  
ID A  
S-AIR sub unit  
ID A  
S-AIR sub unit  
US  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
To use multiple S-AIR main units  
You can use multiple S-AIR main units by  
setting a different ID for each component.  
Tip  
• To confirm the current ID, perform Steps 1 to 6  
above. When you pair the unit with the S-AIR sub  
unit (page 92), [(Pairing)] appears beside ID on the  
display for selecting ID.  
S-AIR main unit  
Other S-AIR  
(This unit)  
To set the ID of the surround  
amplifier  
main unit  
HDMI  
S-AIR  
ID B  
ID A  
1
2
3
Make sure that the SURROUND  
SELECTOR switch of the surround  
amplifier is set to SURROUND.  
Set the S-AIR ID switch of the surround  
amplifier to match the ID (A, B, or C) of  
the unit.  
Press POWER on the surround  
amplifier.  
ID A  
S-AIR  
sub unit  
ID B  
S-AIR sub unit  
ID A  
S-AIR sub unit  
When sound transmission is established,  
the POWER / ON LINE indicator of the  
surround amplifier turns green.  
For details of the POWER / ON LINE  
Tip  
• When you use the additional surround amplifier  
(optional) with the surround back speakers  
(optional), set the SURROUND SELECTOR  
switch to SURROUND BACK.  
To set the ID of the S-AIR  
receiver  
Refer to the operating instructions of the S-AIR  
receiver.  
US  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Select the desired function on the  
S-AIR receiver.  
Enjoying the system’s sound in  
another room  
x When “PARTY” is set  
The S-AIR receiver’s function changes  
sequentially as you press FUNCTION of  
the main unit (page 64).  
For the S-AIR receiver  
You can enjoy the system’s sound by using the  
S-AIR receiver. The S-AIR receiver can be  
installed anywhere, regardless of the location of  
the unit, for enjoying the system’s sound in  
another room.  
x When “SEPARATE” is set  
The S-AIR receiver’s function changes as  
follows.  
“MAIN UNIT” t “TUNER FM” t  
For details of the S-AIR receiver, refer to the  
operating instructions of the S-AIR receiver.  
“TUNER AM” t “DMPORT” t …  
To enjoy the same function as the unit,  
select “MAIN UNIT.”  
1
Set the ID of the S-AIR receiver to that  
of the main unit.  
When “TUNER FM” or “TUNER AM” is  
selected on the unit, you can only select the  
same band for the tuner on the S-AIR  
receiver. In this case, when you select other  
than “TUNER FM” or “TUNER AM” on  
the unit, you can select any band for the  
tuner on the S-AIR receiver.  
• To set the ID of the unit, see “To set the ID  
• To set the ID of the S-AIR receiver, refer  
to the operating instructions of the S-AIR  
receiver.  
2
Press S-AIR MODE on the remote of the  
main unit.  
4
Adjust the volume on the S-AIR  
receiver.  
The S-AIR mode appears in the front panel  
display. Each time you press S-AIR  
MODE, the S-AIR mode changes.  
• “PARTY”: The S-AIR receiver outputs  
sound according to function set on the  
unit.  
Note  
• When the sound is other than 2 channel stereo, multi  
channel sound is downmixed to 2 channel.  
• The sound of the S-AIR receiver may be cut off by  
operation of the unit.  
• “SEPARATE”: You can set the desired  
function for the S-AIR receiver while unit  
functions do not change.  
To control the system from the  
S-AIR receiver  
You can control the system from the S-AIR  
receiver by using the following buttons.  
Press  
Operation  
H, X, x,  
./>  
Share the same operations on the  
remote and unit.  
S-AIR CH  
Change the function of the system.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions of  
the S-AIR receiver.  
US  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying the S-AIR receiver  
while the unit is in standby  
mode  
Using the surround amplifier  
for the surround back speakers  
For the surround amplifier  
For the S-AIR receiver  
When you use the additional surround amplifier  
(optional) with surround back speakers  
(optional), set the SURROUND SELECTOR  
switch to SURROUND BACK. For details  
about the surround back speakers, see “About  
You can enjoy the S-AIR receiver while the unit  
is in standby mode by setting [S-AIR Standby]  
to [On].  
1
2
Press "/1.  
The system turns on.  
Press HOME.  
Identifying the unit with a  
specific S-AIR sub unit  
(Pairing operation)  
For the surround amplifier  
For the S-AIR receiver  
The home menu appears on the TV screen.  
3
4
Press C/c to select  
Press X/x to select [System Settings],  
then press  
Press X/x to select [S-AIR Standby],  
then press  
[Setup].  
.
5
6
.
It is easy to set the same ID for the unit and an  
S-AIR sub unit, such as a surround amplifier or  
S-AIR receiver, to establish sound transmission.  
However, neighbors may also receive your  
system’s sound if IDs are the same, or you may  
receive the sound from neighbors. To prevent  
this, you can identify the unit with a specific  
S-AIR sub unit by performing the pairing  
operation.  
Press X/x to select the desired setting.  
• [On]: You can enjoy the S-AIR receiver  
while the unit is in standby mode or turned  
on.  
• [Off]: You cannot enjoy the S-AIR  
receiver while the unit is in standby mode.  
7
Press  
.
The setting is made.  
x Before pairing  
Sound transmission is established by the ID  
(example).  
Note  
• When you set [S-AIR Standby] to [On], the power  
consumption during the standby mode increases.  
• When you turn the system off while [S-AIR Standby]  
is set to [On], “S-AIR” flashes (when sound  
transmission between the unit and S-AIR receiver is  
not established), or lights up (when sound  
Your room  
This unit  
Neighbor  
HDMI  
S-AIR  
transmission between the unit and S-AIR receiver is  
established) in the front panel display.  
ID A  
• If you turn the system off with the disc tray opened  
while [S-AIR Standby] is set to [On], the disc tray  
may not close automatically.  
• When the wireless transceiver is not inserted in the  
unit, you cannot set the [S-AIR Standby].  
• [S-AIR Standby] is set to [Off] automatically when  
the wireless transceiver is removed from the unit.  
ID A  
S-AIR sub unit  
ID A  
S-AIR sub unit  
US  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
x After pairing  
Sound transmission is established between the  
paired unit and S-AIR sub unit(s) only.  
7
8
Press C/c to select [OK], then press  
.
The unit starts pairing.  
To not perform pairing, select [Cancel].  
Your room  
This unit  
Neighbor  
Start pairing of the S-AIR sub unit.  
HDMI  
S-AIR  
x For the surround amplifier  
Press POWER on the surround amplifier to  
turn on the surround amplifier and press  
PAIRING on the rear panel of the surround  
amplifier.  
ID A  
No transmission  
The PAIRING indicator of the surround  
amplifier flashes red when pairing starts.  
When sound transmission is established,  
the PAIRING indicator of the surround  
amplifier turns red and the confirmation  
display appears.  
ID A  
S-AIR sub unit  
ID A  
S-AIR sub unit  
Pairing  
Tip  
• To press PAIRING on the rear panel of the  
surround amplifier, a slim instrument, such as a  
paper clip, can be used.  
To perform pairing  
1
Place the S-AIR sub unit that you want  
to pair near the unit.  
x For the S-AIR receiver  
Refer to the operating instructions of the  
S-AIR receiver.  
Note  
• Remove headphones from the surround  
amplifier (if connected).  
When sound transmission is established,  
the confirmation display appears.  
2
Match the IDs of the unit and the S-AIR  
sub unit.  
Note  
• Perform the pairing within several minutes after  
Step 8. If you do not, the pairing is canceled  
automatically and the confirmation display  
appears. To perform pairing, select [OK]. To  
return to the previous display, select [Cancel].  
• To set the ID of the unit, see “To set the ID  
• To set the ID of the surround amplifier,  
9
Press C/c to select the next operation.  
• To set the ID of the S-AIR receiver, refer  
to the operating instructions of the S-AIR  
receiver.  
x To finish pairing  
Select [Finish], then press  
.
3
Press HOME.  
x To perform pairing of another S-AIR  
sub unit  
The home menu appears on the TV screen.  
Select [Continue], then press  
.
4
5
Press C/c to select  
Press X/x to select [System Settings],  
then press  
Press X/x to select [S-AIR Pairing],  
then press  
The confirmation display appears.  
[Setup].  
Note  
• If you perform the pairing operation between the unit  
and another S-AIR sub unit (page 92), sound  
transmission established by ID is canceled.  
• When you perform pairing, [(Pairing)] appears beside  
ID on the display for selecting ID.  
.
6
.
US  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To cancel pairing  
Note  
• In most cases, you will not need to change this  
setting.  
Perform the ID setting of the unit according to  
(page 89). If you select a new ID (you can select  
the same ID as before), pairing is canceled.  
• If [S-AIR RF Change] is set to [Off], transmission  
between the unit and S-AIR sub unit can be  
performed using one of the following channels.  
– S-AIR ID A: equivalent channel for Wi-Fi  
channel 1  
If sound transmission is  
unstable  
For the surround amplifier  
For the S-AIR receiver  
– S-AIR ID B: equivalent channel for Wi-Fi  
channel 6  
– S-AIR ID C: equivalent channel for Wi-Fi  
channel 11  
• The transmission may be improved by changing the  
transmission channel (frequency) of the other  
wireless system(s). For details, refer to the operating  
instructions of the other wireless system(s).  
If you use multiple wireless systems which  
sharing the 2.4 GHz band, such as wireless LAN  
or Bluetooth, the transmission of S-AIR  
products or other wireless systems may be  
unstable. In this case, the transmission may be  
improved by changing the following [S-AIR RF  
Change] setting.  
1
Press HOME.  
The home menu appears on the TV screen.  
2
3
Press C/c to select  
Press X/x to select [System Settings],  
then press  
Press X/x to select [S-AIR RF Change],  
then press  
[Setup].  
.
4
5
.
Press X/x to select the desired setting.  
• [Auto]: Normally select this. The system  
changes the setting to [On] or [Off]  
automatically.  
• [On]: The system transmits sound by  
searching the better channel for  
transmitting.  
• [Off]: The system transmits sound by  
fixing the channel for transmitting.  
6
7
Press  
.
The setting is made.  
When you set to [Off], select the ID so  
that sound transmission is most  
stabilized (page 89).  
US  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
• Depending on the connected component, the Control  
for HDMI function may not work. Refer to the  
operating instructions supplied with the component.  
• The Control for HDMI function may not work if you  
connect a component other than Sony, even if the  
component is compatible with the Control for HDMI  
function.  
Other Operations  
Using the Control for  
HDMI Function for  
“BRAVIA” Sync  
Preparing for the Control for  
HDMI function  
This function is available on TVs with the  
“BRAVIA” Sync function only.  
By connecting Sony components that are  
compatible with the Control for HDMI function  
with an HDMI cable (not supplied), operation is  
simplified as below:  
(Control for HDMI - Easy Setting)  
The system is compatible with the Control for  
HDMI - Easy Setting function. If the TV is  
compatible with the Control for HDMI - Easy  
Setting function, you can set the system’s  
[Control for HDMI] function automatically by  
setting the TV. For details, refer to the operating  
instructions of the TV.  
– Theater Mode (page 96)  
– One-Touch Play (page 96)  
– System Power Off (page 97)  
– Volume Limit (page 97)  
– System Audio Control (page 97)  
– Language Follow (page 97)  
If the TV is not compatible with the Control for  
HDMI - Easy Setting function, set the Control  
for HDMI function of the system and TV  
manually.  
Control for HDMI is a mutual control function  
standard used by CEC (Consumer Electronics  
Control) for HDMI (High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface).  
Note  
• Displayed items vary depending on the country  
model.  
The Control for HDMI function will not work in  
the following cases:  
1
Make sure that the system is  
connected to the TV and the connected  
components (which should be  
compatible with the Control for HDMI  
function) using HDMI cables.  
– When you connect this system to a  
component which is not compatible with the  
Control for HDMI function.  
– A component does not have an HDMI jack.  
2
3
Turn on the TV and press [/1 to turn on  
the system.  
There are convenient buttons on the system’s  
remote for operating the TV, such as  
THEATER, ONE-TOUCH PLAY, AV "/1. For  
(page 101) and refer to the operating  
instructions of the TV.  
Switch the input selector on your TV so  
that the signal from the system through  
the HDMI input appears on the TV  
screen.  
4
Set the Control for HDMI function of the  
system and TV.  
The Control for HDMI function for the  
system and the connected component is  
simultaneously set to on.  
ONE-TOUCH  
AV  
THEATER  
PLAY  
BRAVIA Sync  
STB  
TV  
BD  
OPERATION CHANGE  
2
During the setting, “SCANNING” appears  
in the panel display. After you finish the  
setting, “COMPLETE” appears in the panel  
display. Wait until the setting is complete.  
1
3
1
2
3
US  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Note  
Tip  
• For details on setting the TV and the connected  
components, refer to their operating  
instructions.  
• The default setting of the Control for HDMI function  
of the system is [Off].  
If “SCANNING” or “COMPLETE”  
does not appear after performing  
in Control for HDMI – Easy Setting  
Set the Control for HDMI function to on for the  
system and the connected components  
individually.  
Using the Theater Mode  
(Theater Mode)  
When you press THEATER, the system  
automatically switches to the optimum video  
mode for watching movies and the speaker  
output also switches automatically. When  
connected with a Theater Mode-compatible TV  
using the HDMI cable, the TV's video mode  
switches to Theater Mode.  
1
Press HOME.  
The home menu appears on the TV screen.  
2
3
Press C/c to select  
Press X/x to select [HDMI Settings],  
then press  
[Setup].  
Watching BD/DVD by a single  
button press  
.
The options for [HDMI Settings] appear.  
4
5
Press X/x to select [Control for HDMI],  
(One-Touch Play)  
then press  
.
By only pressing ONE-TOUCH PLAY, the TV  
turns on, the TV is set for BD/DVD input  
selector, and the system starts playing a disc  
automatically.  
Press X/x to select [On], then press  
.
The Control for HDMI function is set to on.  
6
Set the Control for HDMI function of the  
connected component to on.  
The system and TV work as follows (e.g.):  
For details on setting the connected  
component, refer to its operating  
instructions.  
This system  
TV  
Turns on. (If not already Turns on. (If not already  
turned on.)  
turned on.)  
7
Select the input of the system  
r
r
connected to the component you want  
to use the Control for HDMI function for  
(HDMI1, HDMI2), and repeat Step 6.  
Switches to “BD/DVD” Switches to HDMI input.  
function.  
r
r
Minimizes sound level.  
Starts playing the disc and  
outputs the sound.  
(System Audio Control)  
If you add or reconnect the  
component  
When playing back a connected component, the  
system and the TV turn on automatically and  
switch to the appropriate HDMI input.  
Note  
• During the setting of the Control for HDMI function  
for the system, the System Audio Control function  
does not work.  
Note  
• Make sure the HDMI connection is correct, and set  
the [Control for HDMI] to [On].  
• Depending on the TV, the beginning of the content  
may not be played back.  
• If the Control for HDMI function for the connected  
component cannot be set simultaneously by setting  
“CONTROL FOR HDMI” of the TV, set the Control  
for HDMI function using the menu of the connected  
component.  
• Depending on the disc, playback may take a while to  
start.  
• One-Touch Play does not work when you press H.  
• For details on setting the TV and the connected  
components, refer to their operating instructions.  
US  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• When the system is turned on, the TV sound  
will be output from the speakers of the system.  
• When the TV sound is output form the  
speakers of the system, you can adjust the  
volume and turn off the sound of the system  
using the TV remote.  
Turning the system off in sync  
with the TV  
(System Power Off)  
When you turn the TV off by using the POWER  
button on the TV’s remote or AV "/1 on the  
system’s remote, the system turns off  
automatically.  
Note  
• If the TV is turned on before turning on the system,  
TV sound will not be output for a moment.  
• While the TV is in PAP (picture and picture) mode,  
the System Audio Control function will not work.  
When the TV exits PAP mode, the output method of  
the TV returns to the one before PAP mode.  
• When you switch the TV input selector, or depending  
on the status of the connected components, the  
system may switch the input automatically.  
Note  
• Before using the System Power Off function, set the  
function for TV power. For details, refer to the  
operating instructions of the TV.  
• Depending on the status, the system or the connected  
components may not turn off automatically. For  
details, see the operating instructions supplied with  
the connected components.  
Tip  
• You can connect the system and the TV audio  
digitally. For details, see page 48.  
Setting the Maximum Volume  
Level of the System  
Changing the language for the  
on-screen display of the TV  
(Volume Limit)  
If you change the output method of the TV to the  
system speaker on the TV menu or by pressing  
THEATER, loud sound may be output  
depending on the volume level of the system.  
You can prevent this by limiting the maximum  
level of the volume. For details, see [Volume  
(Language Follow)  
When you change the language for the on-screen  
display of the TV, the system's on-screen  
display language is also changed after turning  
the system off and on.  
Enjoying TV sound from the  
speakers in this system  
(System Audio Control)  
You can enjoy TV sound in this system by easy  
operation.  
To use this function, connect the system and the  
TV with an audio cord (not supplied) and an  
HDMI cable (not supplied) (page 48).  
You can use the System Audio Control function  
as follows:  
• You can enjoy TV sound from the speakers of  
the system by means of a simple operation. For  
details, see the operating instructions of the  
TV.  
US  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5
Connect the calibration mic to the  
A.CAL MIC jack on the rear panel.  
Calibrating the  
Appropriate Settings  
Automatically  
[Auto Calibration]  
Set up the calibration mic at the ear level  
using a tripod, etc. (not supplied). The front  
of each speaker should face the calibration  
mic, and there should be no obstruction  
between the speakers and the calibration  
mic.  
D. C. A. C. (Digital Cinema Auto Calibration)  
can set the appropriate surround sound  
automatically.  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT  
IR REMOTE  
T
V
S
A
T
/
C
A
B
L
E
DIGITAL  
IN  
O
P
T
I
C
A
L
CB  
B
CR  
R
P
/
P
/
Y
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OUT  
EZW-RT10  
HDMI  
Y
PB  
/
C
B
P
R
/
CR  
SAT/CABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
LAN(100)  
ANTENNA  
75 COAXIAL  
DC5V  
500mA MAX  
EXTERNAL  
FM  
AM  
R
L
SPEAKER  
TV  
A.CAL  
MIC  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
AUDIO IN  
CENTER WOOFER  
DMPORT  
DC5V  
700mA  
L
ECM-AC2  
Note  
R
L
MAX  
AUDIO  
SAT/CABLIN  
VIDEO  
• The system outputs a loud test sound when [Auto  
Calibration] starts. You cannot turn the volume  
down. Give consideration to children and neighbors.  
• Make sure that the headphones are not connected to  
the surround amplifier. You cannot operate the  
following Steps with the headphones connected.  
A.CAL  
MIC  
2
C
-A  
M
C
E
1
Press HOME.  
The home menu appears on the TV screen.  
Calibration mic  
2
3
Press C/c to select  
Press X/x to select [Audio Settings],  
then press  
Press X/x to select [Auto Calibration],  
then press  
[Setup].  
.
4
.
The confirmation display for [Auto  
Calibration] appears.  
Ex. BDV-IT1000ES  
6
Press X/x to select [OK].  
To cancel, select [Cancel].  
US  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
7
Press  
.
9
Press X/x to select [OK] or [Cancel],  
then press  
.
[Auto Calibration] starts.  
The system adjust the speaker setting  
automatically.  
Be quiet during the measurement.  
x The measurement is OK.  
Disconnect the calibration mic, then select  
[OK]. The result is implemented.  
Note  
x The measurement is not OK.  
Follow the message, then select [OK] to  
retry.  
• Before [Auto Calibration], make sure that the  
surround amplifier turns on and you install the  
surround amplifier in the appropriate location. If  
you install the surround amplifier in an improper  
location, such as another room, proper  
measurement will not be obtained.  
• When you use the additional surround amplifier  
for the surround back speakers (optional), make  
sure that the additional surround amplifier turns  
on and you install the additional surround  
amplifier in the appropriate location.  
• Avoid being in the measurement area and  
making noise during the measurement (about 1  
minute), to avoid measurement failure. During  
the measurement, test signals are output from  
the speakers.  
Note  
• While the Auto Calibration function works:  
– do not turn off the power.  
– do not press any button.  
– do not change the volume.  
– do not change the function.  
– do not change the disc.  
– do not insert or eject a disc.  
– do not connect the headphones to the surround  
amplifier.  
– do not disconnect the calibration mic.  
Tip  
• You can check the distance between the listening  
position and each speaker. See page 100.  
• The environment of the room in which the  
system is installed may affect measurements.  
• Loud test sound is output when [Auto  
Calibration] starts. You cannot turn the volume  
down. Give consideration to children and  
neighbors.  
• If an error message appears, follow the message,  
then select [OK].  
An error message appears when:  
– the headphones are connected to the surround  
amplifier.  
– the calibration mic is not connected.  
– front speakers are not correctly connected.  
– surround speakers are not correctly  
connected.  
– surround back speakers (optional) are not  
correctly connected.  
– subwoofer is not connected.  
8
Confirm the conclusions of [Auto  
Calibration].  
The conclusions appear on the TV screen.  
Press C/c to change the page. The first page  
shows the distance of speakers. The second  
page shows the level of speakers.  
Note  
• If measurement fails, follow the message then  
retry [Auto Calibration].  
US  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[None]: Select this if no surround back speaker  
is used.  
Setting the Speakers  
[Subwoofer]  
[Speaker Settings]  
[Yes]  
To obtain the best possible surround sound, set  
connection of the speakers and their distance  
from your listening position. Then use the test  
tone to adjust the level and the balance of the  
speakers to the same level.  
x [Distance]  
When you move the speakers, be sure to set the  
parameters of the distance (A) from the  
listening position to the speakers.  
You can set the parameters from 0.0 to 7.0  
meters (0 to 23 ft).  
Note  
• You cannot operate [Speaker Settings] when you  
connect headphones to the surround amplifier.  
The speakers in the illustration correspond to the  
following:  
1
Press HOME.  
The home menu appears on the TV screen.  
1Center speaker  
2Front left speakers (L)  
3Front right speakers (R)  
4Subwoofer  
5Surround left speakers (L)  
6Surround right speakers (R)  
7Surround back left speakers (L)  
8Surround back right speakers (R)  
2
3
Press C/c to select  
Press X/x to select [Audio Settings],  
then press  
Press X/x to select [Speaker Settings],  
then press  
[Setup].  
.
4
.
The [Speaker Settings] display appears.  
5
Press X/x to select the item, press  
.
1
2
3
Setup the following settings.  
4
x [Connection]  
If you do not connect center or surround  
speakers, set the parameters for [Center] and  
[Surround]. Since the front speaker and  
subwoofer setting is fixed, you cannot change  
them.  
A
5
6
When you use the additional surround amplifier  
for the surround back speakers (optional)  
(page 28), set [Surround Back] also.  
A
7
8
[Front]  
[Yes]  
[Front L/R] 3.0 m/10 ft: Set the front speaker  
distance.  
[Center]  
[Center] 3.0 m/10 ft*: Set the center speaker  
distance.  
[Yes]: Normally select this.  
[None]: Select this if no center speaker is used.  
[Surround L/R] 3.0 m/10 ft*: Set the surround  
speaker distance.  
[Surround Back L/R] 3.0 m/10 ft*: Set the  
surround back speaker distance.  
[Subwoofer] 3.0 m/10 ft: Set the subwoofer  
distance.  
[Surround]  
[Yes]: Normally select this.  
[None]: Select this if no surround speaker is  
used.  
[Surround Back]  
* This item appears when you set to [Yes] in the  
[Connection] setting.  
[Yes]: Select this if surround back speaker is  
used.  
US  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Note  
• When you perform [Auto Calibration] in the Easy  
Setup (page 60), the default settings are changed.  
• Depending on the input stream, [Distance] may not  
be effective.  
Controlling the TV or  
Other Components with  
the Supplied Remote  
x [Level]  
By adjusting the remote signal, you can control  
your TV, a Sony component (such as a VCR,  
DVD player/recorder, etc.), CATV, or set-top  
box/digital satellite receiver with the supplied  
remote.  
You can adjust the sound level of the speakers,  
center speaker, and subwoofer. You can set the  
parameters from –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB. Be sure to  
set [Test Tone] to [On] for easy adjustment.  
[Front L/R] 0.0 dB: Set the front speaker level.  
[Center] 0.0 dB*: Set the center speaker level.  
[Surround L/R] 0.0 dB*: Set the surround  
speaker level.  
Note  
• When you replace the batteries of the remote, the  
code number may reset itself to the default (SONY)  
setting. Reset the appropriate code number.  
[Surround Back L/R] 0.0 dB*: Set the surround  
Back speaker level.  
Preparing the remote for  
controlling the components  
[Subwoofer] 0.0 dB: Set the subwoofer level.  
* This item appears when you set to [Yes] in the  
[Connection] setting.  
1
Press POP UP/MENU while pressing  
TV (for TV) or STB (for a Sony  
component, CATV, set-top box/digital  
satellite receiver, etc.).  
x [Test Tone]  
The speakers will emit a test tone to adjust  
[Level].  
TV or STB (pressed button) flashes.  
[Off]: The test tone is not emitted from the  
speakers.  
2
While TV or STB is flashing, enter the  
manufacturer’s code (see the table)  
using the number buttons, then press  
TIME.  
[On]: The test tone is emitted from each speaker  
in sequence while adjusting level. When you  
select one of the [Speaker Settings] items, the  
test tone is emitted from each speaker in  
sequence.  
If you successfully set the manufacturer’s  
code, TV or STB will flash twice slowly. If  
the setting is unsuccessful, TV or STB will  
flash five times quickly.  
Adjust the sound level as follows.  
1
2
Set the [Test Tone] to [On].  
Code numbers of controllable  
components  
Press C/X/x/c repeatedly to select the  
desired speaker and the level.  
If more than one code number is listed, try  
entering them one at a time until you find the  
code that works with your TV.  
3
4
5
Press  
.
Repeat Steps 1 to 3.  
Press C/X/x/c repeatedly to set [Test  
Tone] to [Off] after adjusting the  
speaker level.  
TV  
Manufacturer  
SONY  
Code number  
5001 (default), 5002  
5001  
Note  
AIWA  
• The test tone signals are not output from the HDMI  
OUT jack.  
AKAI  
5003  
DAEWOO  
GE  
5003, 5015, 5044  
5003, 5009, 5010, 5044  
5003, 5015, 5017, 5044, 5068  
Tip  
• To adjust the volume of all the speakers at one time,  
press VOLUME +/–.  
GOLDSTAR/LG  
US  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Manufacturer  
Code number  
Manufacturer  
Code number  
HITACHI  
5003, 5014, 5015, 5017, 5044,  
5057, 5071  
GENERAL  
INSTRUMENT  
8018, 8032, 8503, 8512, 8513,  
8514, 8515, 8516, 8517, 8518,  
8519, 8532, 8553, 8554, 8557  
JVC  
5016  
5017  
GNC  
8505  
5825  
KMC  
GOLDSTAR  
HAMLIN  
MAGNAVOX  
5003, 5015, 5017, 5018, 5044,  
5066  
8023, 8024, 8025, 8026, 8532,  
8533, 8534, 8535, 8536  
MARANTZ  
5027  
ILLICO  
8507  
MITSUBISHI/MGA 5003, 5027, 5044, 5066, 5068  
JERROLD  
8001, 8002, 8003, 8004, 8005,  
8006, 8007, 8008, 8018, 8022,  
8032, 8503, 8512, 8513, 8514,  
8515, 8516, 8517, 8518, 8519,  
8532, 8553, 8554, 8557  
NEC  
5003, 5017, 5044, 5066  
5009, 5053, 5072  
5015, 5018, 5057, 5070, 5071  
5009, 5025, 5051  
5003, 5010, 5044  
5066  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
RCA/PROSCAN  
SAMPO  
MACOM  
8033, 8034, 8035, 8540, 8541,  
8542  
MAGNAVOX  
MEMOREX  
MOTOROLA  
NET  
8037  
SAMSUNG  
5003, 5015, 5017, 5044, 5057,  
5066, 5069, 5074  
8506, 8523, 8544  
8503, 8510, 8511  
8030, 8552  
SHARP  
5017, 5035, 5065  
5035, 5041, 5051  
TOSHIBA  
OAK  
8027, 8028, 8029, 8537, 8538,  
8539  
Sony component  
VCR  
7001, 7002, 7003  
PACE  
8507  
DVD player/recorder 4001, 4002, 4003, 4004  
PANASONIC  
8019, 8020, 8021, 8523, 8529,  
8530, 8531  
PARAGON  
PHILIPS  
8506, 8523  
CATV  
8039, 8040, 8041, 8043, 8044,  
8504, 8546, 8547, 8548, 8549,  
8550, 8551  
Manufacturer  
SONY  
Code number  
8501  
ABC  
8513, 8555  
8507, 8510  
8507  
PIONEER  
PULSAR  
QUASAR  
REGAL  
8014, 8015, 8507, 8525, 8526  
8506, 8523  
ADELPHIA  
ADVANCED  
NEWHOUSE  
8523  
8532, 8533, 8534, 8535, 8536  
8507  
ALTRIO  
8507  
8505  
8507  
RODGERS  
RUNCO  
AMERICAST  
8506, 8523  
ATLANTIC  
BROADBAND  
SAMSUNG  
8038, 8525, 8545  
SCIENTIFIC  
ATLANTA  
8009, 8010, 8011, 8502, 8507,  
8508, 8509, 8520, 8521, 8522,  
8555, 8556  
BELL & HOWELL 8513  
BELL SOUTH  
BLUE RIDGE  
BRIGTH HOUSE  
CABLEVISION  
CHARTER  
COMCAST  
COX  
8505  
8507  
SEREN  
8507  
8507  
8507  
8507  
8507  
SIGECOM  
8507  
SUSQUEHANNA  
TIME WARNER  
TOCOM  
8507  
8507  
8016, 8017, 8031, 8527, 8528,  
8553  
8507  
DIRECTOR  
GEMINI  
8503  
TOSHIBA  
8506, 8523  
8507  
8036, 8543  
VIDEOTRON  
US  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manufacturer  
WIDEOPENWEST 8505, 8507  
ZENITH 8012, 8013, 8505, 8506, 8523,  
8524  
Code number  
Manufacturer  
PAYSAT  
PHILIPS  
PROSCAN  
RADIX  
Code number  
8716  
8255, 8278, 8715, 8716, 8718  
8704, 8709, 8719  
8213, 8226, 8231, 8253  
8704, 8709, 8719, 8721  
Set-top box/digital satellite  
receiver  
RCA  
SABA  
8210, 8211, 8230, 8234, 8235,  
8248, 8270, 8286  
Manufacturer  
Code number  
SONY  
8201, 8202, 8203, 8701, 8702,  
8703  
SAMSUNG  
Sky  
8287, 8288, 8717, 8722  
8243  
ADB  
8262  
SKY MASTER  
Sky+  
8205, 8207, 8285  
8295  
ALPHASTAR  
AMSTRAD  
B sky B  
8710  
8204, 8225, 8226, 8247, 8259  
STAR SIGHT  
STRONG  
TECHNISAT  
8716  
8243  
8289, 8290, 8291  
CANAL +  
CROSSDIGITAL  
DGTEC  
8208  
8220, 8221, 8236, 8241, 8246,  
8252, 8266, 8268, 8279, 7280  
8717  
8292, 8293, 8294  
Thomson  
TOMSON  
TOSHIBA  
TPS  
8234, 8271, 8274, 8275  
DIRECTV  
8713, 8717, 8718, 8719, 8723,  
8714  
8283, 8284  
8708  
DISH NETWORK  
ECHOSTAR  
GALAXIS  
8712, 8714, 8725  
8712, 8720  
8256  
UNIDEN  
WATSON  
Zehnder  
8715, 8716  
8206  
8212, 8214, 8216, 8232, 8233,  
8254, 8272  
8209, 8215, 8249, 8251, 8264,  
8268, 8269, 8281, 8282  
GE  
8719  
8711  
GENERAL  
INSTRUMENT  
Gold Box  
Grundig  
8238  
8228, 8229, 8237, 8265  
HIRSCHMANN  
HITACHI  
HUGHES  
Hyundai  
8263  
8707  
8706  
8245  
Jerrold  
8240  
JVC  
8712, 8714, 8720  
KATHREIN  
MAGNAVOX  
MATSUI  
MEMOREX  
NIKKO  
8224, 8244, 8250  
8715, 8716, 8718  
8227  
8716  
8223  
NOKIA  
8219, 8239, 8257, 8276, 7277  
NTV PLUS 2000  
On digital  
PACE  
8242  
8273  
8217, 8218, 8222, 8243, 8260,  
8261  
PANASONIC  
8267, 8705  
US  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
By pressing  
You can  
Controlling the TV with the  
remote  
./>*  
Skips to the previous/next chapter,  
track, or file.  
*
Replay the scene/briefly fast  
forward the scene.  
You can control the TV using the following  
buttons. To use these buttons, set the remote to  
the TV mode by pressing TV (TV lights up for 1  
second).  
m/M*  
Fast reverse/fast forward during  
playback.  
* Only available for the component that is connected  
to the TV with the HDMI or iLINK connection. For  
details, see the operating instructions of the TV.  
Note  
• During the TV mode, if you press any of the  
following buttons, TV lights up. (Depending on the  
manufacturer setting, some buttons may not work,  
and TV does not light up.)  
Tip  
• The function of these buttons are same as the remote  
buttons of the Sony TV. For details, refer to the  
operating instructions of the TV.  
• When you press other than the following buttons  
during the remote is in the TV mode, TV does not  
light up.  
• Depending on the TV, you may not be able to control  
your TV or to use some of the buttons.  
By pressing  
AV "/1  
You can  
Turn the TV on or off.  
THEATER  
Enjoy optimal image suited for  
movies.  
TV INPUT  
Switch the TV’s input source  
between the TV and other input  
sources.  
VOLUME +/–  
CH +/–  
Adjust the TV volume.  
Select the TV channel.  
MUTING  
Turn off the TV sound  
temporarily.  
Number buttons, Select the TV channel.  
, ENTER  
HOME  
FAVORITES  
CC  
Display the menu of the TV.  
Display the favorite channel list.  
Change the subtitle of the TV.  
GUIDE  
Display the Digital Electronic  
Programme Guide (EPG).  
TOOLS  
Display the operation menu for the  
current display.  
RETURN  
Return to the previous channel or  
layer on the menu of the TV.  
Input “.” (dot) when inputting  
numerics.  
WIDE  
Change the aspect ratio of the  
connected TV.  
C/X/x/c,  
H*  
X*  
Select the item on the menu.  
Start playback.  
Pause playback.  
x*  
Stop playback.  
US  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the Sony  
component, CATV, or set-top  
box/digital satellite receiver  
Using the Sound Effect  
Enjoying the sound at low  
volume  
You can control the Sony component such as a  
VCR or DVD player/recorder, CATV, or set-top  
box/digital satellite receiver using the following  
buttons. To use these buttons, set the remote to  
the STB mode by pressing STB (STB lights up  
for 1 second).  
You can enjoy sound effects or dialog, as you  
would in a movie theater, even at low volume. It  
is useful for watching movies at night.  
Press NIGHT.  
“NIGHT ON” appears in the front panel display  
and the sound effect is activated.  
During the night mode is on, “NIGHT” lights up  
in the front panel display.  
Note  
• During the STB mode, if you press any of the  
following buttons, STB lights up. (Depending on the  
manufacturer setting, some buttons may not work,  
and STB does not light up.)  
Note  
• When you press other than the following buttons  
during the remote is in the STB mode, STB does not  
light up.  
• When sound is output from the center speaker, this  
effect is more pronounced, as speech (movie dialog,  
etc.) is easy to hear. When sound is not output from  
the center speaker, or you are using the headphones,  
the system optimally adjusts the volume.  
• Depending on the component, you may not be able to  
control the component or to use some of the buttons.  
By pressing  
You can  
To turn off the sound effect  
AV "/1  
Turn the set-top box/digital  
satellite receiver on or off.  
Press NIGHT so that “NIGHT” disappears from  
the front panel display.  
CH +/–  
Select the set-top box/digital  
satellite receiver channel.  
Number buttons, Select the set-top box/digital  
Adjusting the sound  
, ENTER  
satellite receiver channel.  
HOME  
Display the menu of the set-top  
box/digital satellite receiver.  
You can adjust the sound by changing the tonal  
balance of the sound.  
TOOLS  
Display the operation menu for the  
current display.  
1
Press TONE repeatedly until the  
desired setting appears in the front  
panel display.  
RETURN  
Return to the previous channel or  
layer on the menu of the set-top  
box/digital satellite receiver.  
• “BASS”: You can adjust the bass  
frequencies.  
CLEAR  
Clear the entry field.  
• “MIDDLE” (BDV-IS1000 only): You  
can adjust the middle frequencies.  
• “TREBLE”: You can adjust the treble  
frequencies.  
C/X/x/c,  
Select the item on the menu.  
DVD  
RECORDER  
(HDD, DVD)*  
Change the operation mode for  
Sony DVD recorders.  
H*  
Start playback.  
2
Press X/x to adjust the sound.  
X*  
Pause playback.  
The adjusted value appears in the front  
panel display. You can set the value from  
–6.0 to +6.0.  
x*  
Stop playback.  
*
Briefly fast forward the scene.  
m/M*  
Fast reverse/fast forward during  
playback.  
* Only available for Sony component such as a VCR,  
DVD player/recorder, etc.  
US  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the Sleep Timer  
You can set the system to turn off at a preset  
time, so you can fall asleep listening to music.  
You can preset the time in 10-minutes  
increments.  
Deactivating the Buttons  
on the Unit  
(Child Lock)  
You can deactivate the buttons on the unit  
(except for "/1) for preventing misoperation,  
such as child mischief (child lock function).  
Press SLEEP.  
Each time you press SLEEP, the minutes display  
(the remaining time) changes by 10-minutes.  
When you set the sleep timer, “SLEEP” flashes  
in the front panel display.  
Press x on the unit for more than 5  
seconds.  
CHILD LOCK” and “ON” appear in the front  
panel display.  
The child lock function is activated and the  
buttons on the unit are locked. (You can operate  
the system by using the remote.)  
To cancel, press x for more than 5 seconds so  
that “CHILD LOCK” and “OFF” appear in the  
front panel display.  
To check the remaining time  
Press SLEEP once.  
To change the remaining time  
Press SLEEP repeatedly to select the desired  
time.  
Note  
• When you operate the buttons on the unit while the  
child lock function is on, “CHILD LOCK” appears in  
the front panel display.  
US  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
You can setup the following options.  
Settings and Adjustments  
Icon  
Explanation  
Updates the software of the  
system.  
Using the Setup Display  
You can make various adjustments of items such  
Makes the video settings  
according to the type of  
connecting jacks.  
as picture and sound.  
Select  
(Setup) on the home menu when you  
need to change the settings of the system.  
Makes the audio settings  
Note  
according to the type of  
connecting jacks.  
• Playback settings stored in the disc take priority over  
the Setup Display settings and not all the functions  
described may work.  
Makes detailed settings for BD/  
DVD playback.  
1
2
Press HOME.  
The home menu appears on the TV screen.  
Makes the photo-related  
settings.  
Press C/c to select  
[Setup].  
Network Update  
Makes the HDMI settings.  
Setup  
Video Settings  
Makes the system-related  
settings.  
Audio Settings  
BD/DVD Viewing Settings  
Photo Settings  
Makes detailed settings for  
Internet and network.  
3
Press X/x to select the setup category  
Re-runs the Easy Setup to make  
icon to change, then press  
.
the basic settings.  
Example: [Video Settings]  
Resets the system to the factory  
settings.  
Setup  
TV Type  
4
Press X/x to select an item, then press  
Set the screen aspect ratio of your TV.  
Screen Format  
Original  
.
DVD Aspect Ratio  
Cinema Conversion Mode  
Letter Box  
Auto  
The options for the selected item appear.  
Example: [TV Type]  
Setup  
TV Type  
16:9  
4:3  
Screen Format  
DVD Aspect Ratio  
Cinema Conversion Mode  
Options  
US  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5
Press X/x to select a setting, then  
press  
.
[Network Update]  
You can update and improve the functions of the  
The setting is selected and setup is  
complete.  
The options for the selected item appear.  
Example: [4:3]  
system.  
For information about update functions, refer to  
the following website;  
http://www.sony.net/  
1
Press X/x to select [Network Update],  
then press  
Setup  
.
TV Type  
4 : 3  
Set the screen aspect ratio of your TV.  
Screen Format  
Original  
Letter Box  
Auto  
The unit connects to the network, and the  
display asks for confirmation.  
DVD Aspect Ratio  
Cinema Conversion Mode  
2
Press C/c to select [OK], then press  
.
Selected setting  
The unit starts downloading, then updating  
the software automatically.  
When updating finishes, “COMPLETE!”  
appears for 5 seconds in the front panel  
display, then the system automatically turns  
off.  
3
Press "/1 to turn the system on.  
The system starts up with the updated  
software.  
Note  
• Do not disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead) or  
network cable while downloading or updating  
software.  
• Any operations, including opening the disc tray, are  
not available while updating.  
• Downloading times may differ depending on the  
server provider or line status.  
• When error messages on network connections  
appear, check the network connections using  
[Network Diagnostic] of [Internet Settings] in  
Tip  
• The “UPDATE */9” counter (“*” indicates update  
step) in the front panel display also shows progress of  
the update.  
• You can check the current software version by  
selecting [System Information] in [System Settings]  
• The [Setup] settings remain after updating.  
• The system informs you of newer software version  
information when [Software Update Notification] is  
set to [On] (default) (page 116).  
US  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To update the software using an  
update disc  
You can update and improve the functions of the  
system using an update disc provided by Sony  
dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.  
[Video Settings]  
You can make the video settings according to  
the type of connecting jacks.  
1
2
Insert the update disc.  
x [TV Type]  
You can select the aspect ratio of the connected  
TV.  
The display asks for confirmation.  
Select [OK], and press  
.
Software update starts.  
[16:9]: Select this when connecting to a wide-  
screen TV or a TV with a wide mode function.  
[4:3]: Select this when connecting to a 4:3  
screen TV without a wide mode function.  
When updating finishes, “COMPLETE!”  
appears for 5 seconds in the front panel  
display, then the disc tray automatically  
opens.  
3
4
Remove the disc.  
x [Screen Format]  
You can select the display configuration for a  
4:3 screen picture on a 16:9 wide screen TV.  
The system automatically turns off.  
Press "/1 to turn the system on.  
The system starts up with the updated  
software.  
[Original]: Select this when connecting to a TV  
with a wide mode function. Displays a 4:3  
screen picture in 16:9 aspect ratio even on a  
wide-screen TV.  
Note  
• Do not disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead)  
while updating.  
[Fixed Aspect Ratio]: Changes the picture size  
to fit the screen size with the original picture  
aspect ratio.  
• Any operations, including opening the disc tray, are  
not available while updating.  
Tip  
• The “UPDATE */9” counter (“*” indicates update  
step) in the front panel display also shows progress of  
the update.  
x [DVD Aspect Ratio]  
You can select the display configuration for  
playback of 16:9 screen pictures on a 4:3 screen  
TV (selectable when [TV Type] is set to [4:3]  
and [Screen Format] is set to [Fixed Aspect  
Ratio]).  
• You can check the current software version by  
selecting [System Information] in [System Settings]  
• The [Setup] settings remain after updating.  
• For information about other software update  
methods, refer to the following website or consult  
your nearest Sony dealer or local authorized Sony  
Service facility;  
[Letter Box]: Displays a wide picture with black  
bands on the top and bottom.  
http://www.sony.net/  
[Pan & Scan]: Displays a full-height picture on  
the entire screen, with trimmed sides.  
US  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
“HD” lights up in the front panel display  
when outputting 720p/1080i/1080p video  
signals.  
x [Cinema Conversion Mode]  
You can set the video conversion method for  
480p, 720p, 1080i, or 1080p* signals from the  
HDMI OUT jack or the COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT jacks.  
Note  
• If the picture is distorted or no picture appears,  
wait for about 30 seconds without pressing any  
buttons. The display returns to the resolution  
setting screen.  
* HDMI only  
[Auto]: Normally select this. The unit  
automatically detects whether the material is  
video-based or film-based, and switches to the  
appropriate conversion method.  
[Video]: The conversion method suited for  
video-based material will always be selected  
regardless of the material.  
• If the selected video output resolution is  
incorrect, no picture appears on the screen when  
you press any button in 30 seconds. In this case,  
press and hold H and A on the unit for more  
than 5 seconds to reset the video output  
resolution to the lowest resolution.  
• When connecting the HDMI OUT jack and  
other video output jacks at the same time, video  
signals may not output from the jacks, other than  
from the HDMI OUT jack, when [Auto] or  
[1080p] is selected.  
x [Output Video Format]  
Select the jack type to output video signals ([TV  
Connection Method]), then select output  
resolution for the HDMI/component connection  
([HDMI Resolution]/[Component Resolution]).  
[HDMI Resolution]/[Component  
Resolution]  
[Auto] (HDMI only): Normally select this.  
The unit outputs signals starting from the  
highest resolution acceptable to the TV:  
1080p > 1080i > 720p > 480p > 480i  
If the resulting image format is undesirable,  
try another setting that suits your TV.  
[480i]: Outputs 480i video signals.  
[480p]: Outputs 480p video signals.  
[720p]: Outputs 720p video signals.  
[1080i]: Outputs 1080i video signals.  
[1080p] (HDMI only): Outputs 1080p  
video signals.  
1
Press X/x to select the jack type to  
output video signals, then press  
.
Note  
• When connecting the HDMI OUT jack and  
other video output jacks at the same time, select  
[Component Video].  
[TV Connection Method]  
[HDMI]: Outputs signals from the HDMI  
OUT jack according to the [HDMI  
Resolution] setting below.  
[Component Video]: Outputs signals from  
theCOMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks  
according to the [Component Resolution]  
setting below.  
x [Pause Mode] (BD/DVD VIDEO/DVD-R/  
DVD-RW only)  
[Video or S Video]: Outputs signals from  
the VIDEO OUT (VIDEO) or VIDEO OUT  
(S VIDEO) jack.  
You can select the picture in pause mode.  
[Auto]: The picture, including subjects that  
move dynamically, is output with no jitter.  
Normally select this position.  
2
(When you select [HDMI] or  
[Component Video])  
[Frame]: The picture, including subjects that do  
not move dynamically, is output in high  
resolution.  
Press X/x to select the signal type for  
the HDMI OUT jack or COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT jacks, then press  
.
When you change the video output  
resolution, a picture is displayed in the  
selected resolution for about 30 seconds,  
then the display asks for confirmation.  
Follow the on-screen instructions.  
US  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
x [Attenuate - TV]  
[Audio Settings]  
You can make the audio settings.  
Distortion may occur when you listen to a  
component connected to the TV jacks.  
Distortion is not a malfunction and will depend  
on the component connected.  
To prevent distortion, reduce the input level on  
the unit.  
x [BD Audio Setting]  
Selects whether to mix or not mix interactive  
audio and secondary audio (commentary) when  
playing a BD that contains such audio.  
[On]: Attenuates the input level. The output  
level is changed.  
[Off]: Normal input level.  
[Mix]: Outputs the audio obtained by mixing the  
interactive audio and secondary audio to the  
primary audio.  
x [Attenuate - SAT/CABLE]  
[Direct]: Outputs the primary audio only.  
Distortion may occur when you listen to a  
component connected to the SAT/CABLE IN  
jacks. Distortion is not a malfunction and will  
depend on the component connected.  
To prevent distortion, reduce the input level on  
the unit.  
x [Audio DRC] (BD/DVD VIDEO only)  
You can compress the dynamic range of the  
sound track. [Audio DRC] is useful for watching  
movies at low volume late at night.  
[Auto]: Performs playback at the dynamic range  
specified by the disc (BD-ROM only). Other  
discs are played back at the “Standard” level.  
[Off]: No compression of dynamic range.  
[Standard]: The system reproduces the sound  
track with the kind of dynamic range that the  
recording engineer intended.  
[On]: Attenuates the input level. The output  
level is changed.  
[Off]: Normal input level.  
x [Speaker Settings]  
To obtain the best possible surround sound, set  
the speakers. For details, see “Setting the  
[Max]: The system compresses dynamic range  
fully.  
x [Auto Calibration]  
x [Fs Limit]  
You can calibrate the appropriate settings  
automatically. For details, see “Calibrating the  
You can select the upper limit of sampling  
frequency in the audio signal for full sound  
adjustment.  
[On]: Sets to 48kHz. You can operate all of the  
sound control functions of the system.  
[Off]: Sets to 192kHz.  
Note  
• [Fs Limit] works only for the “BD/DVD,” “HDMI1,”  
or “HDMI2” function.  
• In DTS96/24 format, some sound control functions  
do not work even if you set to [On].  
US  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
If you select [Select Age Restriction], you  
can enter the age from [0] to [255] using C/  
X/x/c and the number buttons.  
[BD/DVD Viewing  
Settings]  
You can make detailed settings for BD/DVD  
playback.  
To cancel the Parental Control setting  
Select [No Restrictions].  
Note  
• If you forget the password, reset the system  
(page 119) and set a new password (see [Password]  
x [BD/DVD Menu]  
You can select the default menu language for  
BD-ROMs or DVD VIDEOs.  
When you select [Select Language Code], the  
display for entering the language code appears.  
Enter the code for your language by referring to  
• When you play discs which do not have the Parental  
Control function, playback cannot be limited on this  
unit.  
• Depending on the disc, you may be asked to change  
the Parental Control level while playing the disc. In  
this case, enter your password, then change the level.  
• When [255] is selected in [Select Age Restriction],  
the Parental Control setting is canceled.  
x [Audio]  
You can select the default track language for  
BD-ROMs or DVD VIDEOs.  
When you select [Original], the language given  
priority in the disc is selected.  
Tip  
• You can change the password. See [Password]  
When you select [Select Language Code], the  
display for entering the language code appears.  
Enter the code for your language by referring to  
x [DVD Parental Control]  
Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be limited  
according to a predetermined level such as the  
age of the users. Scenes may be blocked or  
replaced with different scenes.  
x [Subtitle]  
You can select the default subtitle language for  
BD-ROMs or DVD VIDEOs.  
When you select [Select Language Code], the  
display for entering the language code appears.  
Enter the code for your language by referring to  
1
2
3
Enter your four-digit password using  
the number buttons.  
Press X/x to select [OK], then press  
.
Press X/x to select a level, then press  
.
The lower the value, the stricter the  
limitation.  
x [BD Parental Control]  
Playback of some BD-ROMs can be limited  
according to the age of the users. Scenes may be  
blocked or replaced with different scenes.  
To cancel the Parental Control setting  
Select [No Restrictions].  
Note  
1
2
3
Enter your four-digit password using  
the number buttons.  
• If you forget the password, reset the system  
(page 119) and set a new password (see [Password]  
Press X/x to select [OK], then press  
• When you play discs which do not have the Parental  
Control function, playback cannot be limited on this  
unit.  
.
Press X/x to select the age restriction,  
then press  
.
• Depending on the disc, you may be asked to change  
the Parental Control level while playing the disc. In  
this case, enter your password, then change the level.  
The lower the value, the stricter the  
limitation.  
US  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Tip  
x [Password]  
• You can change the password. See [Password]  
You can set or change the password for the  
Parental Control function. A password allows  
you to set a restriction on BD-ROM or DVD  
VIDEO playback. If necessary, you can  
differentiate the restriction levels for BD-ROMs  
and DVD VIDEOs.  
x [Parental Control Region Code]  
Playback of some BD-ROMs or DVD VIDEOs  
can be limited according to the geographic area.  
Scenes may be blocked or replaced with  
different scenes.  
1
2
Enter your four-digit password using  
the number buttons.  
1
2
3
Enter your four-digit password using  
the number buttons.  
Press X/x to select [OK], then press  
.
Press X/x to select [OK], then press  
.
To change the password  
Press X/x to select the area restriction,  
1
2
3
4
After Step 1, enter your four-digit  
password using the number buttons.  
then press  
.
When you select [Select Region Code], the  
display for entering the region code  
appears. Enter the code for the area  
restriction by referring to “Parental Control/  
Press X/x to select [OK], then press  
.
Enter a new password using the  
number buttons.  
Note  
Press X/x to select [OK], then press  
• If you forget the password, reset the system  
(page 119) and set a new password (see [Password]  
.
x [Hybrid Disc Playback Layer]  
You can select the layer priority when playing a  
Hybrid Disc. To change the setting, turn the  
system off and on again.  
• When you play discs which do not have the Parental  
Control function, playback cannot be limited on this  
unit.  
• Depending on the disc, you may be asked to change  
the Parental Control level while playing the disc. In  
this case, enter your password, then change the level.  
[BD]: Plays BD layer.  
[DVD/CD]: Plays DVD or CD layer.  
Tip  
• You can change the password. See [Password]  
US  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
[Photo Settings]  
[HDMI Settings]  
You can make the photo-related settings.  
You can make the HDMI settings.  
x [Slideshow Speed]  
x [Control for HDMI]  
You can change the slideshow speed.  
You can set the [Control for HDMI] function to  
on/off. This function is available when you  
connect the system and TV with an HDMI cable.  
[Fast]: Photos change rapidly.  
[Normal]: Photos change at normal speed.  
[Slow]: Photos change slowly.  
[On]: On. You can operate mutually between  
components that are connected with an HDMI  
cable.  
[Off]: Off.  
Note  
• This function is available only when you connect the  
unit and TV with the HDMI cable.  
x [Volume Limit]  
If you change the output method of the TV to the  
system speaker on the TV menu or by pressing  
THEATER, the System Audio Control  
(page 97) is activated and loud sound may be  
output depending on the volume level of the  
system. You can prevent this by limiting the  
maximum level of the volume.  
[Level3]: Maximum volume level is set to 15.  
[Level2]: Maximum volume level is set to 20.  
[Level1]: Maximum volume level is set to 30.  
[Off]: Off.  
Note  
• This function is available only when you connect the  
unit and TV with the HDMI cable and [Control for  
HDMI] is set to [On].  
US  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
x [BD-ROM 1080/24p Output]  
x [x.v.Color Output]  
You can set to output 1920 × 1080p/24 Hz video  
signals when playing film-based materials on  
BD-ROMs (720p/24 Hz or 1080p/24 Hz).  
1920 × 1080p/24 Hz video signals can be output  
when all of the following conditions are met.  
Sets whether to send xvYCC information to the  
connected TV.  
Combining xvYCC-compatible video with a TV  
that supports x.v.Color display makes it possible  
to more accurately reproduce object colors  
present in the natural world.  
– You connect a 1080/24p-compatible TV  
using the HDMI OUT jack,  
[Auto]: Normally select this.  
[Off]: Select this when the picture is unstable or  
colors appear unnatural.  
– [Output Video Format] is set to [HDMI], and  
– [HDMI Resolution] is set to [Auto] or  
[1080p].  
The 24P indicator lights up when outputting  
1920 × 1080p/24 Hz video signals.  
x [Audio (HDMI)]  
You can set the output type for the audio signal  
from the HDMI OUT jack.  
[Auto]: Outputs 1920 × 1080p/24 Hz video  
signals only when connecting a 1080/24p-  
compatible TV using the HDMI OUT jack.  
[On]: Outputs 1920 × 1080p/24 Hz video  
signals regardless of the connected TV type.  
[Off]: Select this when your TV is not  
compatible with 1080/24p video signals.  
[AMP]: HDMI audio signals are output to the  
system speakers only. The multi-channel sound  
can be played back as it is.  
[TV+AMP]: HDMI audio signals are output  
from the TV’s speaker and the system’s  
speakers.  
Note  
Note  
• Video signals may not be output when [BD-ROM  
1080/24p Output] is set to [On].  
• If you set to [TV+AMP], the sound quality of the  
system depends on the TV's sound quality, such as the  
number of channels, the sampling frequency, etc.  
When the TV has stereo speakers, the sound output  
from the system’s speakers is also stereo as that of the  
TV, even if you play multi-channel source.  
• When you connect the system to a video component  
(projector, etc.), sound may not be output from the  
system. In this case, select [AMP].  
x [YCbCr/RGB]  
You can set the color setting for video signals  
output from the HDMI OUT jack. Select the  
setting that matches the connected TV type.  
[Auto]: Automatically detects the type of  
external device, and switches to the matching  
color setting.  
• When the System Audio Control function (page 97)  
is activated, this setting may change automatically.  
[YCbCr (4:2:2)]: Outputs YCbCr 4:2:2 video  
signals.  
[YCbCr (4:4:4)]: Outputs YCbCr 4:4:4 video  
signals.  
[RGB (16-235)]: Select this when connecting to  
a device with an HDCP-compliant DVI jack.  
[RGB (0-255)]: Select this when connecting to  
an RGB (0-255) device.  
US  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
[On]: Turns on the screen saver function.  
[Off]: Off.  
[System Settings]  
You can make the system-related settings.  
x [S-AIR ID]  
You can set the S-AIR ID of the system. For  
x [OSD]  
You can select your language for the system on-  
screen displays.  
x [S-AIR Pairing]  
x [Dimmer]  
You can pair the system and S-AIR sub unit,  
such as surround amplifier or S-AIR receiver.  
You can adjust the lighting of the front panel  
display.  
[Bright]: Bright lighting.  
[Dark]: Low lighting.  
x [S-AIR Standby]  
x [Standby Mode]  
You can enjoy the S-AIR receiver while the unit  
is in standby mode. For details, see “Enjoying  
You can shorten the startup time when turning  
the system on.  
[Quick Start]: Shortens the startup time from  
standby mode. You can operate the system  
quickly after turning it on.  
x [S-AIR RF Change]  
[Normal]: The default setting.  
You can improve the S-AIR transmission by  
changing the setting. For details, see “If sound  
Note  
• When [Standby Mode] is set to [Quick Start],  
– power consumption will be higher than when  
[Standby Mode] is set to [Normal].  
– the ventilation fan may turn on depending on the  
surrounding temperature.  
x [Software Update Notification]  
You can get information of newer software  
version. The information appears on the TV  
screen when you turn the system on. Network  
connections and settings are required when  
using this function (page 117).  
x [Auto Display]  
You can display information when switching  
audio modes or during playback.  
[On]: Sets the system to inform you of newer  
software version information (page 108).  
[Off]: Off.  
[On]: Automatically displays information on the  
screen when changing the viewing titles, picture  
modes, audio signals, etc.  
[Off]: Displays information only when you  
x [System Information]  
You can display the system’s software version  
information and the MAC address.  
press  
DISPLAY.  
x [Screen Saver]  
The screen saver image appears when you do not  
use the system for more than 15 minutes while  
an on-screen display, such as the home menu, is  
displayed on your TV screen. The screen saver  
image helps prevent your display device from  
becoming damaged (ghosting).  
US  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
3
If your ISP has a specific proxy server  
setting, press X/x to select [Proxy  
[Network Settings]  
You can make detailed settings for Internet and  
Settings], then press  
.
The [Proxy Settings] display appears.  
If the proxy server does not have a specific  
setting, go to step 8.  
network.  
x [Internet Settings]  
4
5
6
Press X/x to select [Use of Proxy  
These items are necessary when you connect to  
the Internet via a network cable. Enter the  
respective (alphanumeric) values for your  
broadband router or Wireless LAN router. The  
items that need to be set may differ, depending  
on the Internet service provider or the router. For  
details, refer to the instruction manuals that have  
been provided by your Internet service provider  
or supplied with the router.  
Server], then press  
.
Press X/x to select [On], then press  
.
Select [Proxy Server] and [Port], and  
enter the settings.  
To enter the proxy server, see “To enter  
7
8
Press RETURN.  
1
2
Press X/x to select [IP Address  
Acquisition], then press  
Press X/x to select [Network  
.
Diagnostic], then press  
.
Press X/x to select an item, then press  
9
Press C/c to select [Start], then press  
.
.
[Use DHCP]: Select this when DHCP  
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)  
server settings are available from your  
Internet service provider. The network  
settings necessary for the system will be  
assigned automatically.  
10  
Check that the message [Network  
connections are correct.] appears.  
The setup is finished. If the message does  
not appear, follow the on-screen messages.  
To enter characters  
The display for entering characters appears  
when you select [Proxy Server] in [Proxy  
Settings].  
If you set [DNS Server Auto Acquisition] to  
[Off], set the following item:  
– [DNS Server (Primary)]  
– [DNS Server (Secondary)]  
Proxy Server Entry  
[Use Static IP Address]: Set the IP address  
manually according to your network  
environment.  
Clear  
Clear All  
Set the following items:  
Space 0  
Cancel  
Finish  
– [IP Address]  
Letter Type  
Symbol  
– [Subnet Mask]  
– [Default Gateway]  
– [DNS Server (Primary)]  
– [DNS Server (Secondary)]  
1
Press the number button repeatedly to  
select a character.  
Example:  
Press the number 3 button once to enter [D].  
Press the number 3 button three times to  
enter [F].  
Note  
• When you set the [DNS Server (Primary)]/  
[DNS Server (Secondary)] addresses manually,  
enter the [DNS Server (Secondary)] address.  
Otherwise, the [Internet Settings] will be set  
incorrectly.  
2
3
Press c, and enter the next character.  
Press YELLOW ([Finish]) to finish.  
US  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
You can use the following buttons to enter  
characters.  
[Easy Setup]  
You can recall the Easy Setup to make the basic  
Buttons  
Details  
RED  
[Letter Type]  
Switches the keyboard between  
alphabet and numbers.  
settings.  
1
2
Press C/c to select [Start], then press  
GREEN  
[A/a]  
Switches the keyboard between  
upper case and lower case.  
.
BLUE  
[Symbol]  
Displays the keyboard for  
symbols.  
Follow the instructions for Step 5:  
from step 4.  
YELLOW  
[Finish]  
The input is entered, and the  
system returns to the previous  
display.  
CLEAR  
Erases the character to the right  
[Clear]/[Clear All] of the cursor.  
To erase all displayed characters,  
press and hold CLEAR for 2  
seconds or more.  
RETURN  
[Cancel]  
Returns to the previous display,  
canceling the input.  
C/X/x/c,  
• Select an input function using  
C/X/x/c, and press  
.
• Enter characters as follows:  
1Select a character selection  
panel using C/X/x/c, and press  
. 2Select a character using  
C/c, and press  
.
US  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[Resetting]  
You can reset the system settings to the factory  
default by selecting the group of settings. All the  
settings within the group will be reset.  
1
2
Press  
to select [Reset to Factory  
Default Settings], then press  
.
Press X/x to select the settings you  
want to reset to default, then press  
.
You can reset the following settings:  
– [Video Settings]  
– [Audio Settings]  
– [BD/DVD Viewing Settings]  
– [Photo Settings]  
– [HDMI Settings]  
– [System Settings]  
– [Network Settings]  
– [All Settings]  
The display asks for confirmation.  
3
Press C/c to select [Start], then press  
.
To cancel, select [Cancel].  
Note  
• When [All Settings] is selected in Step 2, all system  
settings are reset, and the system turns off.  
US  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Do not place heavy objects on the unit.  
On operation  
Additional Information  
Precautions  
On safety  
• To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not place objects  
filled with liquids, such as vases, on the unit, or place  
the unit near water, such as near a bathtub or shower  
room. Should any solid object or liquid fall into the  
cabinet, unplug the unit and have it checked by  
qualified personnel before operating it any further.  
• Do not touch the AC power cord (mains lead) with  
wet hands. Doing so may cause an electric shock.  
• If the system is brought directly from a cold to a warm  
location, or is placed in a very damp room, moisture  
may condense on the lenses inside the control unit.  
Should this occur, the system may not operate  
properly. In this case, remove the disc and leave the  
system turned on for about half an hour until the  
moisture evaporates.  
• When you move the system, take out any disc. If you  
don’t, the disc may be damaged.  
• If anything falls into the cabinet, unplug the unit and  
have it checked by qualified personnel before  
operating it any further.  
On adjusting volume  
• Do not turn up the volume while listening to a section  
with very low level inputs or no audio signals. If you  
do, the speakers may be damaged when a peak level  
section is suddenly played.  
WARNING  
To prevent injury, this apparatus must be securely  
attached to the floor/wall in accordance with the  
installation instructions.  
On cleaning  
On power sources  
• Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a soft cloth  
slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do  
not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder or  
solvent such as alcohol or benzine.  
If you have any questions or problems concerning  
your system, please consult your nearest Sony dealer.  
• Unplug the unit from the wall outlet (mains) if you do  
not intend to use it for an extended period of time. To  
disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug, never by  
the cord.  
On placement  
• Place the system in a location with adequate  
ventilation to prevent heat build-up in the system.  
• At high volume, over long periods of time, the cabinet  
becomes hot to touch. This is not a malfunction.  
However, touching the cabinet should be avoided. Do  
not place the unit in a confined space where  
ventilation is poor as this may cause overheating.  
• Do not block the ventilation slots by putting anything  
on the system. The system is equipped with a high  
power amplifier. If the ventilation slots are blocked,  
the unit can overheat and malfunction.  
On cleaning discs, disc/lens  
cleaners  
• Do not use cleaning discs or disc/lens cleaners  
(including wet or spray types). These may cause  
the apparatus to malfunction.  
On replacement of parts  
• In the events that this unit is repaired, repaired parts  
may be collected for reuse or recycling purposes.  
On your TV’s color  
• Do not place the unit on surfaces (rugs, blankets, etc.)  
or near materials (curtains, draperies) that may block  
the ventilation slots.  
• If the speakers should cause the TV screen to have  
color irregularity, turn off the TV then turn it on after  
15 to 30 minutes. If color irregularity should persist,  
place the speakers further away from the TV set.  
• Do not install the unit in a confined space, such as a  
bookshelf or similar unit.  
• Do not install the unit near heat sources such as  
radiators, air ducts, or in a place subject to direct  
sunlight, excessive dust, mechanical vibration, or  
shock.  
• Do not install the unit in an inclined position. It is  
designed to be operated in a horizontal position only.  
• Keep the unit and discs away from components with  
strong magnets, such as microwave ovens, or large  
loudspeakers.  
US  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IMPORTANT NOTICE  
Caution: This system is capable of holding a still  
Notes about the Discs  
On handling discs  
• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its  
edge. Do not touch the surface.  
video image or on-screen display image on your  
television screen indefinitely. If you leave the still  
video image or on-screen display image displayed  
on your TV for an extended period of time you risk  
permanent damage to your television screen.  
Projection televisions are especially susceptible to  
this.  
• Do not stick paper or tape on the disc.  
On moving the system  
Before moving the system, make sure that there is no  
disc inserted, and remove the AC power cord (mains  
lead) from the wall outlet (mains).  
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or  
heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave it in  
a car parked in direct sunlight as the  
temperature may rise considerably inside the  
car.  
About S-AIR function  
• As the S-AIR function transmits sound by radio  
waves, sound may skip when radio waves are  
obstructed. This is a characteristic of radio waves and  
is not malfunction.  
• After playing, store the disc in its case.  
• As the S-AIR function transmits sound by radio  
waves, equipment that generates electromagnetic  
energy, such as a microwave oven, may interfere with  
sound transmission.  
On cleaning  
• Before playing, clean the disc with a cleaning  
cloth.  
• As the S-AIR function uses the radio waves that share  
the same frequency as other wireless systems, such as  
wireless LAN or Bluetooth, interference or poor  
transmission may result. In this case, take the  
following steps:  
Wipe the disc from the center out.  
– Do not install the system near other wireless  
systems.  
– Do not use the system and the other wireless  
systems at the same time.  
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner,  
commercially available cleaners, or anti-static  
spray intended for vinyl LPs.  
• The transmission distance differs depending on the  
usage environment. Find a location where  
transmission between the S-AIR main unit and sub  
unit is most effective, and install the S-AIR main unit  
and sub unit there.  
This system can only play back a standard  
circular disc. Using neither standard nor circular  
discs (e.g., card, heart, or star shape) may cause  
a malfunction.  
About the surround amplifier  
• The nameplate is located on the side exterior.  
Do not use a disc that has a commercially  
available accessory attached, such as a label or  
ring.  
US  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
If you experience any of the following difficulties while using the system, use this troubleshooting  
guide to help remedy the problem before requesting repairs. Should any problem persist, consult your  
nearest Sony dealer.  
Note that if service personnel changes some parts during repair, these parts may be retained.  
In the event of a problem with the S-AIR function, have a Sony dealer check the entire system together  
(S-AIR main unit and sub unit).  
Power  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The power is not turned on.  
• Check that the AC power cord (mains lead) is connected securely.  
• Press "/1 after “STANDBY” disappears from the front panel display.  
If “PROTECTOR” and “PUSH Press "/1 to turn off the system, and check the following items after  
POWER” appear alternately in “STANDBY” disappears.  
the front panel display.  
• Are the + and – speaker cords short-circuited?  
• Are you using only the specified speakers?  
• Is anything blocking the ventilation holes of the system?  
• After checking the above items and fixing any problems, turn on the system. If  
the cause of the problem cannot be found even after checking all the above  
items, consult your nearest Sony dealer.  
US  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Picture  
Symptom  
Remedy  
There is no picture.  
• The video connecting cords are not connected securely.  
• The video connecting cords are damaged.  
• The unit is not connected to the correct TV input jack (page 48).  
• The video input on the TV is not set so that you can view pictures from the  
system.  
• Check the output method on your system (page 48).  
• Re-connect the connecting cord securely.  
• The unit is connected to an input device that is not HDCP (High-bandwidth  
Digital Content Protection) compliant (“HDMI” on the front panel does not  
light up) (page 48).  
• When playing a double-layer DVD, the video and audio may be momentarily  
interrupted at the point where the layers switch.  
No picture appears when the  
• Press and hold H and A on the unit for more than 5 seconds to reset the video  
video output resolution selected output resolution to the lowest resolution.  
in [Output Video Format] is  
incorrect.  
Video signals are not output  
from the jacks, other than from  
the HDMI OUT jack, when  
connecting the HDMI OUT jack  
and other video output jacks at  
the same time.  
• Set [Output Video Format] to [Component Video] in [Video Settings]  
The dark area of the picture is too • Set [Picture Quality Mode] to [Standard] (default) (page 72).  
dark/the bright area is too bright  
or unnatural.  
The picture is not output  
correctly.  
• Check the [Output Video Format] settings in [Video Settings] (page 109).  
Picture noise appears.  
• The disc is dirty or flawed.  
• If the picture output from your system goes through your VCR to get to your  
TV, the copy-protection signal applied to some BD/DVD programs could affect  
picture quality. If you still experience problems even when you connect your  
unit directly to your TV, try connecting your unit to the other input jacks  
Even though you set the aspect • The aspect ratio on the disc is fixed.  
ratio in [TV Type] of [Video  
Settings], the picture does not fill  
the TV screen.  
Color irregularity occurs on the • If the speakers are used with a CRT-based TV or projector, install the speakers  
TV screen.  
at least 0.3 meters (1.0 ft) from the TV set.  
• If the color irregularity persists, turn off the TV set once, then turn it on after 15  
to 30 minutes.  
• If howling occurs, reposition the speakers farther away from the TV set.  
• Make sure that no magnetic object (magnetic latch on a TV stand, health care  
device, toy, etc.) is placed near the speakers.  
US  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sound  
Symptom  
Remedy  
There is no sound.  
• The speaker cord is not connected securely.  
• Press MUTING on the remote if “MUTING ON” is displayed in the front panel  
display.  
• The system is in pause mode. Press H to return to normal play mode.  
• Fast forward or fast reverse is performed. Press H to return to normal play  
mode.  
• Check the speaker settings (page 100).  
No sound is output from the  
HDMI OUT jack.  
• The HDMI OUT jack is connected to a DVI (Digital Visual Interface) device  
(DVI (Digital Visual Interface) jacks do not accept audio signals).  
• Try the following: 1 Turn the system off and on again. 2 Turn the connected  
component off and on again. 3 Disconnect and then connect the HDMI cable  
again.  
• Set [Audio (HDMI)] in [HDMI Settings] to [TV+AMP] (page 115).  
The Super Audio CD sound of a • HDMI1 and HDMI2 does not accept an audio format that contains copy  
component that is connected to  
the HDMI1 or HDMI2 jack is  
not output.  
protection (page 133). Connect the analog audio output of the component to the  
SAT/CABLE IN (AUDIO R/L) or TV (AUDIO IN R/L) jacks of the unit.  
The left and right sounds are  
unbalanced or reversed.  
• Check that the speakers and components are connected correctly and securely.  
There is no sound from the  
subwoofer.  
• Check the speaker connections and settings (pages 45, 100).  
• Select “A.F.D. STD” for the decoding mode (page 77).  
Severe hum or noise is heard.  
• Check that the speakers and components are connected securely.  
• Check that the connecting cords are away from a transformer or motor, and at  
least 3 meters (10 ft) away from your TV set or a fluorescent light.  
• Move your TV away from the audio components.  
• The plugs and jacks are dirty. Wipe them with a cloth slightly moistened with  
alcohol.  
• Clean the disc.  
The sound loses stereo effect  
when you play a CD.  
• Select stereo sound by pressing AUDIO (page 81).  
• Make sure the unit is connected properly.  
The surround effect is difficult to • Make sure the decoding mode setting (page 77).  
hear when you are playing a  
sound track of Dolby Digital,  
DTS, or MPEG audio.  
• Check the speaker connections and settings (pages 45, 100).  
• Depending on the BD/DVD, the output signal may not be the entire 5.1 channel.  
It may be monaural or stereo even if the sound track is recorded in Dolby  
Digital or MPEG audio format.  
The sound comes from the center • Depending on the disc, the sound may come from the center speaker only.  
speaker only.  
No sound is heard from the  
center speaker.  
• Check the speaker connections and settings (pages 45, 100).  
• Make sure the decoding mode setting (page 77).  
• Depending on the source, the effect of the center speaker may be less  
noticeable.  
• A 2 channel source is being played.  
No sound or only a very low-  
level sound is heard from the  
surround speakers.  
• Check the speaker connections and settings (pages 45, 100).  
• Make sure the decoding mode setting (page 77).  
• Depending on the source, the effect of the surround speakers may be less  
noticeable.  
• Check the wireless setting (page 58).  
• A 2 channel source is being played.  
US  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The beginning of the sound is cut • Set the sound mode to “MOVIE” or “MUSIC” (page 80).  
off.  
• Select “A.F.D. STD” for the decoding mode (page 77).  
Operation  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Radio stations cannot be tuned • Check that the antenna (aerial) is connected securely. Adjust the antenna  
in.  
(aerial) or connect an external antenna (aerial) if necessary.  
• The signal strength of the stations is too weak (when tuning in with automatic  
tuning). Use direct tuning.  
• No stations have been preset or the preset stations have been cleared (when  
tuning by scanning preset stations). Preset the stations (page 83).  
• Press DISPLAY so that the frequency appears in the front panel display.  
Noise is heard on AM radio.  
The remote does not function.  
• Check the location of the AM loop antenna (aerial) and cord (page 53).  
• There are obstacles between the remote and the unit.  
• The distance between the remote and the unit is too far.  
• The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor on the unit.  
• The batteries in the remote are weak.  
The disc does not play.  
• The disc is dirty.  
• There is no disc inserted.  
• The disc is upside down.  
Insert the disc with the playback side facing down.  
• The disc is skewed on the disc tray.  
• You are attempting to play a disc with a format that cannot be played back by  
this system (page 130).  
• The region code on the BD/DVD does not match the system.  
• Moisture has condensed inside the unit and may cause damage to the lenses.  
Remove the disc and leave the unit turned on for about half an hour.  
• The system cannot play a recorded disc that is not correctly finalized  
The JPEG image file cannot be • The following photo files cannot be played.  
played.  
– Photo files larger than 8,192 pixels (width or height)  
– Photo files smaller than 15 pixels (width or height)  
– Photo files exceeding 32 MB  
– Photo files with extreme aspect ratios (greater than 50:1 or 1:50)  
– Photo files in Progressive JPEG format  
– Photo files that have a “.jpeg” or “.jpg” extension, but not in JPEG format  
– Photo files that have an extremely long name  
– Photo files recorded on BD-Rs in any format other than UDF (Universal  
Disk Format) 2.6  
– Photo files recorded on BD-REs in any format other than UDF (Universal  
Disk Format) 2.5  
• Photo files edited on a PC may not be played.  
• It does not fit the TV screen.  
The file name are not displayed • The system can only display ISO 8859-1-compliant character formats. Other  
correctly.  
character formats may be displayed differently.  
• Depending on the writing software used, the input characters may be displayed  
differently.  
US  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom  
Remedy  
A disc does not start playing  
from the beginning.  
• Resume Play has been selected.  
Press OPTIONS and select [Play from Beginning], then press  
.
• The title or BD/DVD menu automatically appears on the TV screen.  
• The BD/DVD features an auto playback function.  
The system starts playing the  
disc automatically.  
Playback stops automatically.  
• Some discs may contain an auto pause signal. While playing such a disc, the  
system stops playback at the auto pause signal.  
You cannot perform some  
• Depending on the disc, you may not be able to perform some of the operations  
functions such as stop or search. above. Refer to the operating instructions supplied with the disc.  
Messages do not appear on the • In the Setup Display, select the desired language for the on-screen display in  
TV screen in the language you  
want.  
The language for the soundtrack/ • Try using the BD’s or DVD’s menu instead of the direct selection button on the  
subtitle or angles cannot be  
changed.  
remote (page 69).  
• Multi-lingual tracks/subtitles or multi-angles are not recorded on the BD or  
DVD being played.  
• The BD or DVD prohibits the changing of the language for the sound track/  
subtitle or angles.  
The disc tray does not open and • Try the following: 1 Press and hold VOLUME – and A on the unit for more  
you cannot remove the disc even than 5 seconds to open the disc tray. 2 Remove the disc. 3 Disconnect the AC  
after you press A.  
power cord (mains lead) from the wall outlet (mains), then reconnect after  
several minutes.  
A disc cannot be ejected and  
“LOCKED” appears in the front  
panel display.  
• Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.  
The system does not work  
normally.  
• Disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead) from the wall outlet (mains), then  
reconnect after several minutes.  
The Control for HDMI function • When “HDMI” does not light up in the front panel display, check the HDMI  
does not work.  
connection (page 48).  
• Set [Control for HDMI] in [HDMI Settings] to [On] (page 114).  
• Make sure that the connected component is compatible with the [Control for  
HDMI] function.  
• Check that the AC power cord (mains lead) of the connected component is  
connected securely.  
• Check the connected component’s setting for the Control for HDMI function.  
Refer to the operating instructions supplied with the component.  
• If you change the HDMI connection, connect and disconnect the AC power  
cord (mains lead), or have a power failure, set [Control for HDMI] in [HDMI  
Settings] to [Off], then set [Control for HDMI] in [HDMI Settings] to [On]  
No sound is output from the  
system and TV while using the  
System Audio Control function.  
• Make sure that the connected TV is compatible with the System Audio Control  
function.  
The external memory is not  
recognized.  
• Try the following: 1 Turn the system off. 2 Align the V mark of the  
EXTERNAL slot with the V mark on the external memory, and insert the  
external memory (page 55). 3 Turn the system on. 4 Check that the  
EXTERNAL indicator lights up in the front panel display.  
US  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Bonus contents or other data that • Try the following: 1 Remove the disc. 2 Turn the system off. 3 Remove and  
are contained in a BD-ROM  
cannot be played.  
re-insert the external memory (page 55). 4 Turn the system on. 5 Check that  
the EXTERNAL indicator lights up in the front panel display. 6 Insert the BD-  
ROM with BonusView.  
A message indicating that the  
local storage does not have  
enough space appears on the  
screen.  
• Delete unnecessary data in the external memory (page 69).  
The unit does not work and  
“CHILD LOCK” appears in the  
front panel display when you  
press any button on the unit.  
• Set the child lock function to off (page 106).  
The S-AIR function  
Symptom  
Remedy  
S-AIR connection is not  
established (sound transmission  
is not established), e.g., the  
indicator of the S-AIR sub unit  
does the following:  
• Turns off.  
• If you use another S-AIR main unit, place it more than 8 m (26 1/4 feet) away  
from the unit.  
• Confirm the ID of the unit and S-AIR sub unit (page 89).  
• You performed pairing the unit and another S-AIR sub unit. Perform pairing of  
the desired S-AIR sub unit (page 92).  
• The unit is paired to another S-AIR sub unit. To cancel pairing, reset the ID of  
the unit and S-AIR sub unit (page 89).  
• Flashes.  
• Turns red.  
• Install the S-AIR main unit and S-AIR sub unit away from other wireless  
products.  
• Stop using another wireless product.  
• The S-AIR sub unit is turned off. Make sure the AC power cord (mains lead) is  
connected and turn on the S-AIR sub unit.  
No sound is heard from the  
S-AIR sub unit.  
• If you use another S-AIR main unit, place it more than 8 m (26 1/4 feet) away  
from the unit.  
• Confirm the ID of the unit and S-AIR sub unit (page 89).  
• Confirm the pairing setting (page 92).  
• Install the S-AIR main unit and S-AIR sub unit closer together.  
• Avoid use of equipment that generates electromagnetic energy, such as a  
microwave oven.  
• Install the S-AIR main unit and S-AIR sub unit away from other wireless  
products.  
• Stop using another wireless product.  
• Change the [S-AIR RF Change] setting (page 94).  
• Change the ID settings of the S-AIR main unit and S-AIR sub unit.  
• Turn off the system and S-AIR sub unit, then turn on them.  
There is noise or the sound skips. • If you use another S-AIR main unit, place it more than 8 m (26 1/4 feet) away  
from the unit.  
• Install the S-AIR main unit and S-AIR sub unit closer together.  
• Avoid use of equipment that generates electromagnetic energy, such as a  
microwave oven.  
• Install the S-AIR main unit and S-AIR sub unit away from other wireless  
products.  
• Stop using another wireless product.  
• Change the [S-AIR RF Change] setting (page 94).  
• Change the ID settings of the S-AIR main unit and S-AIR sub unit.  
US  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Surround amplifier operation  
If no sound is output from the surround speakers, check the status of the POWER / ON LINE indicator  
on the surround amplifier. For details of the POWER / ON LINE indicator, see “Step 4: Setting up the  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The power is not turned on.  
• Check that the AC power cord (mains lead) is connected securely.  
The POWER / ON LINE  
indicator does not turn on.  
Turn off the surround amplifier and remove the AC power cord (mains lead) of  
the surround amplifier, then check the following items.  
• Are the + and – speaker cords short-circuited?  
• Is anything blocking the ventilation holes of the surround amplifier?  
• After checking the above items and fixing any problems, connect the AC power  
cord (mains lead) of the surround amplifier and turn on the surround amplifier.  
If the cause of the problem cannot be found even after checking all the above  
items, consult your nearest Sony dealer.  
There is no sound.  
• turns green  
Check the status of the  
POWER / ON LINE indicator on  
the surround amplifier.  
– Check the speaker connections and settings.  
– The volume of the unit is set to minimum.  
– The unit is in muting status.  
– Depending on the source or the settings of the unit, the effect of the speakers  
may be less noticeable.  
– Headphones are connected.  
• flashes green  
– The unit is not turned on.  
– You performed pairing the unit and another S-AIR sub unit.  
– The surround amplifier is paired to another S-AIR main unit.  
– Confirm the IDs of the unit and surround amplifier (page 89).  
– Pairing operation is not completed.  
– Sound transmission is poor.  
Move the surround amplifier so that the POWER / ON LINE indicator turns  
green.  
– Install the unit and surround amplifier apart from another wireless product.  
– Stop using another wireless product.  
– The wireless transceiver(s) is/are not inserted correctly.  
• turns red  
– Change the SURROUND SELECTOR switch (SURROUND or  
SURROUND BACK) of the surround amplifier to match the unit.  
“HP NO LINK” and “VOLUME • Volume becomes the minimum when you turn off the surround amplifier with  
MIN” appear alternately in the  
front panel display, and the  
volume of the unit becomes  
minimum.  
headphones connected before you turn off the unit or if radio reception is poor.  
In these cases, check radio reception, and set the volume again.  
US  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Self-diagnosis Function  
When the self-diagnosis function is activated to  
prevent the system from malfunctioning, an  
error code appears in the front panel display, or  
just  
appears without any messages on the  
entire screen. In these cases, check the  
following.  
When an error code appears in  
the front panel display  
Error code  
Corrective action  
Exxxx  
Contact your nearest Sony dealer or  
local authorized Sony service  
facility and give the error code.  
SYSTEM  
ERROR  
Turn off the system, then turn it on.  
If the system does not work  
normally, consult your nearest Sony  
dealer or local authorized Sony  
service facility.  
When just  
appears without  
any messages on the entire  
screen  
Contact your nearest Sony dealer or local  
authorized Sony service facility.  
US  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playable Discs  
Type  
Disc logo  
Characteristics  
Icon  
Blu-ray Disc  
BD-ROMs and BD-REs/BD-Rs in  
BDMV and BDAV mode, including  
8 cm discs (single layer) and DL  
discs  
DVD VIDEO  
Discs such as movies that can be  
purchased or rented  
DVD/DATA DVD  
DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs in +VR mode  
or DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in video and  
VR mode, including 8 cm discs  
(single layer) and DVD+R DL/  
DVD-R DL discs  
DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-RWs/  
DVD-Rs containing JPEG* image  
files  
CD  
Music CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in  
music CD format  
DATA CD  
CD-Rs/CD-RWs containing JPEG  
image files  
* JPEG format conforming to UDF (Universal Disk Format).  
Notes about BD-ROM compatibility  
Since the Blu-ray Disc specifications are new and evolving, some discs may not be playable depending  
on the disc type and the version.  
The audio output differs depending on the source, connected output jack, and selected audio settings.  
Discs that cannot be played  
• BDs with cartridge  
• DVD-RAMs  
• HD DVDs  
• DVD Audio discs  
• PHOTO CDs  
• Data part of CD-Extras  
• VCDs/Super VCDs  
• HD layer on Super Audio CDs  
• BD-ROMs/DVD VIDEOs with a different region code (page 131).  
• A disc recorded in a color system other than NTSC, such as PAL (this system conforms to the NTSC  
color system).  
US  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note on playback operations of a BD/DVD  
Some playback operations of a BD/DVD may be intentionally set by software producers. Since this  
system plays a BD/DVD according to the disc contents the software producers designed, some  
playback features may not be available. Refer to the instructions supplied with the BD/DVD.  
Region code (BD-ROM/DVD VIDEO only)  
Your system has a region code printed on the rear of the unit and will only play a BD-ROM/DVD  
VIDEO (playback only) labeled with identical region codes. This system is used to protect copyrights.  
ALL  
DVD VIDEO labeled  
will also play on this system.  
If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO, the message [Playback prohibited by region code.] will  
appear on the TV screen. Depending on the BD-ROM/DVD VIDEO, no region code may be indicated  
even though playing the BD-ROM/DVD VIDEO is prohibited by area restrictions.  
Notes about BD-REs/BD-Rs, DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs, or  
CD-Rs/CD-RWs  
Some BD-REs/BD-Rs, DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs, or CD-Rs/CD-RWs cannot be  
played on this system due to the recording quality or physical condition of the disc, or the  
characteristics of the recording device and authoring software.  
A DVD disc will not play if it has not been correctly finalized. For more information, refer to the  
operating instructions supplied with the recording device. Note that some playback functions may not  
work with some DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, even if they have been correctly finalized. In this case, view  
the disc using normal playback.  
Music discs encoded with copyright protection technologies  
This product is designed to play back discs that conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard. Various  
music discs encoded with copyright protection technologies are being marketed by some record  
companies. Please be aware that among those discs, there are some that do not conform to the CD  
standard and may not be playable by this product.  
Note on DualDiscs  
A DualDisc is a two sided disc product which mates DVD recorded material on one side with digital  
audio material on the other side. However, since the audio material side does not conform to the  
Compact Disc (CD) standard, playback on this product is not guaranteed.  
Note about double-layer DVDs  
The playback pictures and sound may be momentarily interrupted when the layers switch.  
Note about 8 cm BD-REs/8 cm BD-Rs  
Some 8 cm BD-REs/8 cm BD-Rs cannot be played on this system.  
Note about BD-REs/BD-Rs  
This system supports Ver. 2.1 BD-RE and Ver. 1.1 and 1.2 BD-R including organic pigment type BD-  
R (LTH type).  
US  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About playback of discs recorded in AVCHD format  
This system can play AVCHD format discs.  
TM  
What is the AVCHD format?  
The AVCHD format is a high-definition digital video camera format used to record SD (standard  
definition) or HD (high definition) signals of either the 1080i specification* or the 720p specification**  
on DVDs, using efficient data compression coding technology. The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format is  
adopted to compress video data, and the Dolby Digital or Linear PCM system is used to compress audio  
data. The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format is capable of compressing images at higher efficiency than that  
of the conventional image compressing format. The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format enables a high  
definition (HD) video signal shot on a digital video camera recorder to be recorded on DVD discs, in  
the same way as it would be for a standard definition (SD) television signal.  
* A high-definition specification which utilizes 1080 effective scanning lines and the interlace system.  
**A high-definition specification which utilizes 720 effective scanning lines and the progressive system.  
Note  
• Some AVCHD format discs may not play, depending on the recording condition.  
• The AVCHD format disc will not play if it has not been correctly finalized.  
US  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Supported Audio Formats  
Audio formats supported by this system are as follows.  
Format  
LPCM 2ch  
LPCM 5.1ch,  
LPCM 7.1ch  
Dolby  
DolbyDigital  
Plus  
Dolby  
TrueHD  
DTS,  
DTS-ES  
Discrete 6.1,  
DTS-ES  
DTS-HD  
High  
Resolution  
Audio  
DTS-HD  
Master  
Audio  
Digital,  
DolbyDigital  
EX  
Function  
Matrix 6.1,  
DTS96/24  
“BD/DVD”  
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a*  
“HDMI1”  
“HDMI2”  
a
“SAT/CABLE”  
“TV”  
a
a
a
(DIGITAL IN)  
a: Supported format.  
–: Unsupported format.  
* When [Output Video Format] is set to [Video or S Video] (page 110), or [HDMI Resolution]/[Component  
Resolution] is set to [480i] or [480p] (page 110), the sound is DTS decoded.  
Note  
• The table above is valid only when you set [BD Audio Setting] to [Direct] (page 111) and [Fs Limit] to [Off]  
(page 111). If another setting is used, depending on the audio format, sound may be decoded to a suitable format  
automatically.  
• HDMI1 and HDMI2 do not input sound in the case of an audio format that contains copy protections such as Super  
Audio CD or DVD-Audio.  
US  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Video Output Resolution  
Output resolution differs depending on the [Output Video Format] setting in [Video Settings]  
When [Output Video Format] is set to  
[HDMI]  
When [Output Video Format] is set to  
[Component Video]  
Resolution  
setting  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
jack  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
jacks  
(VIDEO,  
S VIDEO)  
jack  
HDMI OUT  
(VIDEO,  
S VIDEO)  
jack  
HDMI OUT  
jack  
jack  
480i  
480i  
480i  
480i  
480i  
480i  
480p  
720p  
1080i  
1080p  
480i  
480i  
480i  
480p  
480i  
480p  
480p  
720p  
1080i  
1080p  
480i  
480i  
480i  
720p*  
1080i*  
720p*  
1080i*  
480i  
480i  
480i  
no picture  
no picture  
unselectable  
unselectable unselectable  
* Protected contents on DVDs are output at 480p resolution.  
When [Output Video Format] is set to [Video or S Video]  
480i video signals are output from the VIDEO OUT (VIDEO, S VIDEO) or COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT jack, and 480p video signals are output from the HDMI OUT jack.  
Note  
• The video input signal from the SAT/CABLE (VIDEO) jack or COMPONENT VIDEO IN (SAT/CABLE) jacks  
is not output from the VIDEO OUT (S VIDEO) jack.  
About the video output resolution of a connected component  
Resolution of the output video signal  
Resolution  
VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT COMPONENT  
Function  
Input jack  
of the input  
video signal  
HDMI OUT  
jack  
(VIDEO)  
jack  
(S VIDEO)  
jack  
VIDEO OUT  
jacks  
VIDEO IN  
jack  
480i  
480i  
no picture  
no picture  
480p  
480i  
480p  
720p  
1080i  
480i  
no picture  
no picture  
no picture  
no picture  
480i  
no picture  
no picture  
no picture  
no picture  
no picture  
480i  
480p  
480p  
480p  
720p  
1080i  
480p  
“SAT/CABLE”  
“DMPORT”*  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
jacks  
720p  
1080i  
DMPORT  
jack  
no picture  
* Available only when connecting a DIGITAL MEDIA PORT adapter that can output video signal.  
Note  
• You cannot change the video output resolution of a connected component.  
US  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
distortion from 250 milli  
watts to rated output.  
Specifications  
Amplifier Section  
(HCD-IT1000ES)  
POWER OUTPUT AND TOTAL HARMONIC  
DISTORTION:  
Subwoofer:  
With 4 ohms loads, both  
channels driven, from 30 -  
800 Hz; rated 75 watts per  
channel minimum RMS  
power, with no more than  
0.7% total harmonic  
(FTC Output Power)  
for the US model  
distortion from 250 milli  
watts to rated output.  
Front L/Front R:  
With 3.5 ohms loads, both  
channels driven, from 200  
- 20,000 Hz; rated 50 watts  
per channel minimum  
Power output (rated) for the Canadian model  
Front L/ Front R  
35 W + 35 W  
(at 10 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 %  
THD)  
RMS power, with no more  
than 0.7% total harmonic  
distortion from 250 milli  
watts to rated output.  
RMS output power (reference)  
Front L / Front R*:  
50 W + 50 W  
(at 10 ohms, 1 kHz, 10 %  
THD)  
Subwoofer:  
With 2 ohms loads, from  
30 - 200 Hz; rated 75 watts  
per channel minimum  
Center*:  
50 W  
(at 10 ohms, 1 kHz, 10 %  
THD)  
100 W  
(at 4 ohms, 70 Hz, 10 %  
THD) + 100 W (at 4 ohms,  
500 Hz, 10 % THD)  
RMS power, with no more  
than 0.7% total harmonic  
distortion from 250 milli  
watts to rated output.  
Subwoofer*:  
Power output (rated) for the Canadian model  
*
Depending on the decoding mode settings and the  
source, there may be no sound output.  
Front L/ Front R  
80 W + 80 W  
(at 3.5 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 %  
THD)  
Inputs (Analog)  
TV, SAT/CABLE  
RMS output power (reference)  
Sensitivity: 450 mV (ATT  
ON), 250 mV (ATT OFF)  
Impedance: 50 kilohms  
Front L / Front R*:  
100 W + 100 W  
(at 3.5 ohms, 1 kHz, 10 %  
THD)  
Inputs (Digital/COAXIAL)  
SAT/CABLE, TV  
Center*:  
100 W  
Impedance: 75 ohms  
(at 3.5 ohms, 1 kHz, 10 %  
THD)  
Video Section  
Outputs  
VIDEO: 1 Vp-p 75 ohms  
S VIDEO:  
Y: 1 Vp-p 75 ohms  
C: 0.286 Vp-p 75 ohms  
COMPONENT:  
Y: 1 Vp-p 75 ohms  
PB/CB, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p  
75 ohms  
VIDEO: 1 Vp-p 75 ohms  
COMPONENT:  
Subwoofer*:  
200 W  
(at 2 ohms, 100 Hz, 10 %  
THD)  
*
Depending on the decoding mode settings and the  
source, there may be no sound output.  
Amplifier Section  
(HCD-IS1000)  
POWER OUTPUT AND TOTAL HARMONIC  
DISTORTION:  
(FTC Output Power)  
Inputs  
Y: 1 Vp-p 75 ohms  
PB/CB, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p  
75 ohms  
for the US model  
Front L/Front R:  
With 10 ohms loads, both  
channels driven, from 800  
- 20,000 Hz; rated 35 watts  
per channel minimum  
HDMI section  
Connector  
HDMI 19pin-standard  
connector  
Video inputs  
HDMI1, HDMI2:  
640 × 480p@60 Hz  
720 × [email protected]/60 Hz  
RMS power, with no more  
than 0.7% total harmonic  
US  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
720 × [email protected]/60 Hz  
1280 × [email protected]/60 Hz  
1920 × [email protected]/  
60 Hz  
Mass (approx.)  
0.5 kg (1 lb 1 /4 oz)  
3
0.5 kg (1 lb 1 /4 oz) with  
the wall bracket  
1
1.0 kg (2 lbs 3 /2 oz) with  
1920 × [email protected]/  
60 Hz  
the desktop stand  
Center (SS-ITC1)  
Speaker system  
720 × 576i@50 Hz  
720 × 576p@50 Hz  
1280 × 720p@50 Hz  
1920 × 1080i@50 Hz  
1920 × 1080p@50 Hz  
1920 × 1080p@24 Hz  
2-way speaker system,  
Bass reflex  
21  
Speaker unit  
16 mm × 120 mm ( /32 in  
3
× 4 /4 in), cone type × 3  
Rated impedance  
Dimensions (approx.)  
3.5 ohms  
540 mm × 19.5 mm × 30.5  
3
25  
BD/DVD/CD System  
Laser  
mm (21 /8 in × /32 in ×  
1
Semiconductor laser  
(BD: λ = 405 nm)  
(DVD: λ = 650 nm)  
(CD: λ = 790 nm)  
Emission duration:  
continuous  
1
/4 in) (w/h/d)  
597 mm × 19.5 mm × 35  
5
25  
mm (23 /8 in × /32 in ×  
7
1
/16 in) (w/h/d) with the  
wall bracket  
0.5 kg (1 lb 1 /4 oz)  
0.5 kg (1 lb 1 /4 oz) with  
3
Mass (approx.)  
3
Signal format system  
NTSC  
the wall bracket  
Tuner Section  
System  
PLL quartz-locked digital  
synthesizer  
Surround (SS-ITR1)  
Speaker system  
Full range speaker system,  
Bass reflex  
FM tuner section  
Tuning range  
21  
87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz  
(100 kHz step)  
FM wire antenna (aerial)  
Speaker unit  
16 mm ×120 mm ( /32 in ×  
3
4
/4 in), cone type × 2  
Antenna (aerial)  
Antenna (aerial) terminals 75 ohms, unbalanced  
Intermediate frequency  
AM tuner section  
Tuning range  
Rated impedance  
Dimensions (approx.)  
3.5 ohms  
19.5 mm × 546 mm × 30.5  
25  
1
10.7 MHz  
mm ( /32 in × 21 /2 in ×  
1
1
/4 in) (w/h/d)  
530 kHz - 1,710 kHz (with  
the interval set at 10 kHz)  
531 kHz - 1,710 kHz (with  
the interval set at 9 kHz)  
AM loop antenna (aerial)  
450 kHz  
19.5 mm × 602 mm × 35  
25  
3
mm ( /32 in × 23 /4 in ×  
7
1
/16 in) (w/h/d) with the  
wall bracket  
Antenna (aerial)  
Intermediate frequency  
121 mm × 560 mm × 121  
7
1
mm (4 /8 in × 22 /8 in ×  
7
4
/8 in) (w/h/d) with the  
Speakers (BDV-IT1000ES)  
Front (SS-ITF1)  
desktop stand  
1
Mass (approx.)  
0.4 kg (14 /4 oz)  
1
Speaker system  
2-way speaker system,  
0.4 kg (14 /4 oz) with the  
Bass reflex  
wall bracket  
0.9 kg (1 lb 15 /8 oz) with  
21  
7
Speaker unit  
16 mm ×120 mm ( /32 in ×  
3
4
/4 in), cone type × 3  
the desktop stand  
Rated impedance  
3.5 ohms  
Dimensions (approx.)  
19.5 mm × 546 mm × 30.5  
Subwoofer (SS-ITW1)  
25  
1
mm ( /32 in × 21 /2 in ×  
1
Speaker system  
Subwoofer system, Bass  
1
/4 in) (w/h/d)  
reflex  
19.5 mm × 602 mm × 35  
Speaker unit  
150 mm (6 in), cone type ×  
2
2 ohms  
196 mm × 410 mm × 372  
25  
3
mm ( /32 in × 23 /4 in ×  
7
1
/16 in) (w/h/d) with the  
Rated impedance  
Dimensions (approx.)  
wall bracket  
121 mm × 560 mm × 121  
3
1
mm (7 /4 in × 16 /4 in ×  
7
1
mm (4 /8 in × 22 /8 in ×  
7
3
14 /4 in) (w/h/d)  
4
/8 in) (w/h/d) with the  
1
Mass (approx.)  
10.5 kg (22 lbs 18 /2 oz)  
desktop stand  
US  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speakers (BDV-IS1000)  
Surround amplifier (TA-SA100WR)  
Front/Center/Surround (SS-IS15)  
Amplifier Section (BDV-IT1000ES)  
AUDIO POWER SPECIFICATIONS  
for the US model  
Speaker system  
Full range speaker system  
7
Speaker unit  
35 mm (1 /16 in), cone  
type  
10 ohms  
POWER OUTPUT AND TOTAL HARMONIC  
DISTORTION:  
Rated impedance  
Dimensions (approx.)  
45 mm × 55 mm × 40 mm  
With 3.5 ohms loads, both  
channels driven, from 200  
- 20,000 Hz; rated 50 watts  
per channel minimum  
13  
1
(1 /16 in × 2 /4 in ×  
5
1
/8 in) (w/h/d)  
Mass (approx.)  
0.07 kg (3 oz)  
RMS power, with no more  
than 0.7% total harmonic  
distortion from 250 milli  
watts to rated output.  
Subwoofer (SS-ISW1)  
Speaker system  
2-way subwoofer system,  
Bass reflex  
3
Power output (rated) for Canadian model  
80 W + 80 W  
Speaker unit  
120 mm (4 /4 in), cone  
3
type + 160 mm (6 /8 in),  
(at 3.5 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 %  
THD)  
cone type  
4 ohms  
Rated impedance  
RMS output power (reference)  
100 W + 100 W  
Dimensions (approx.)  
196 mm × 360 mm × 372  
3
1
mm (7 /4 in × 14 /4 in ×  
3
(at 3.5 ohms, 1 kHz, 10 %  
THD)  
14 /4 in) (w/h/d)  
9.0 kg (19 lbs 13 /4 oz)  
3
Mass (approx.)  
Amplifier Section (BDV-IS1000)  
AUDIO POWER SPECIFICATIONS  
for the US model  
POWER OUTPUT AND TOTAL HARMONIC  
DISTORTION:  
General  
Power requirements  
Power consumption  
(BDV-IT1000ES)  
120 V AC, 60 Hz  
On: 140 W  
Standby: 0.3 W (at the  
Power Saving mode)  
On: 100 W  
With 10 ohms loads, both  
channels driven, from 800  
- 20,000 Hz; rated 35 watts  
per channel minimum  
Power consumption  
(BDV-IS1000)  
Standby: 0.3 W (at the  
Power Saving mode)  
RMS power, with no more  
than 0.7% total harmonic  
distortion from 250 milli  
watts to rated output.  
Output voltage/current  
(DIGITAL MEDIA PORT)  
DC 5 V/700 mA  
LAN (100):  
EXTERNAL:  
100BASE-TX Terminal  
External memory slot (For  
connecting the external  
memory)  
DC output: 5 V 500 mA  
Max  
430 mm × 125 mm × 355  
mm (17 in × 5 in × 14 in)  
(w/h/d) incl. projecting  
parts  
430 mm × 125 mm × 385  
mm (17 in × 5 in × 15 1/4  
in) (w/h/d) with the  
wireless transceiver  
inserted  
Power output (rated) for Canadian model  
35 W + 35 W  
(at 10 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 %  
THD)  
RMS output power (reference)  
50 W + 50 W  
Dimensions (approx.)  
(at 10 ohms, 1 kHz, 10 %  
THD)  
Rated impedance:  
3 - 16 Ω  
General  
Power requirements  
Power consumption  
Dimensions (approx.)  
120 V AC, 60 Hz  
On: 50 W  
85 mm × 100 mm × 330  
Mass (approx.)  
10 kg (22 lbs 1 oz)  
3
mm (3 /8 in × 4 in × 13 in)  
(w/h/d) (incl. EZW-RT10)  
85 mm × 100 mm × 345  
3
5
mm (3 /8 in × 4 in × 13 /8  
in) (w/h/d) incl. speaker  
US  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
cord cover and speaker  
cord holder  
Mass (approx.)  
1.7 kg (3 lb 12 oz) incl.  
speaker cord cover and  
speaker cord holder  
Wireless transceiver (EZW-RT10)  
Communication system  
S-AIR Specification  
version 1.0  
Output  
12.0 mW  
Frequency band  
Modulation method  
Power requirements  
Dimensions (approx.)  
2.4000 GHz - 2.4835 GHz  
DSSS  
DC 3.3 V, 350 mA  
50 mm × 13 mm × 60 mm  
(2 in × 17/32 in × 2 3/8 in) (w/  
h/d)  
Mass (approx.)  
24 g (1 oz)  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
• Standby power consumption 0.3 W.  
• Halogenated flame retardants are not  
used in the printed wiring boards.  
• Over 85% power efficiency of  
amplifier block is achieved with the  
full digital amplifier, S-Master.  
US  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Language Code List  
The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.  
Code Language  
Code Language  
Code Language  
Code Language  
1027 Afar  
1183 Irish  
1347 Maori  
1507 Samoan  
1508 Shona  
1509 Somali  
1511 Albanian  
1512 Serbian  
1513 Siswati  
1514 Sesotho  
1515 Sundanese  
1516 Swedish  
1517 Swahili  
1521 Tamil  
1028 Abkhazian  
1032 Afrikaans  
1039 Amharic  
1044 Arabic  
1045 Assamese  
1051 Aymara  
1052 Azerbaijani  
1053 Bashkir  
1057 Byelorussian  
1059 Bulgarian  
1060 Bihari  
1061 Bislama  
1066 Bengali;  
Bangla  
1067 Tibetan  
1070 Breton  
1079 Catalan  
1093 Corsican  
1097 Czech  
1103 Welsh  
1105 Danish  
1109 German  
1130 Bhutani  
1142 Greek  
1144 English  
1145 Esperanto  
1149 Spanish  
1150 Estonian  
1151 Basque  
1157 Persian  
1165 Finnish  
1166 Fiji  
1186 Scots Gaelic  
1194 Galician  
1196 Guarani  
1203 Gujarati  
1209 Hausa  
1349 Macedonian  
1350 Malayalam  
1352 Mongolian  
1353 Moldavian  
1356 Marathi  
1357 Malay  
1358 Maltese  
1363 Burmese  
1365 Nauru  
1217 Hindi  
1226 Croatian  
1229 Hungarian  
1233 Armenian  
1235 Interlingua  
1239 Interlingue  
1245 Inupiak  
1248 Indonesian  
1253 Icelandic  
1254 Italian  
1257 Hebrew  
1261 Japanese  
1269 Yiddish  
1283 Javanese  
1287 Georgian  
1297 Kazakh  
1298 Greenlandic  
1299 Cambodian  
1300 Kannada  
1301 Korean  
1305 Kashmiri  
1307 Kurdish  
1311 Kirghiz  
1369 Nepali  
1376 Dutch  
1525 Telugu  
1527 Tajik  
1528 Thai  
1379 Norwegian  
1393 Occitan  
1403 (Afan)Oromo  
1408 Oriya  
1417 Punjabi  
1428 Polish  
1435 Pashto;  
Pushto  
1436 Portuguese  
1463 Quechua  
1481 Rhaeto-  
Romance  
1482 Kirundi  
1483 Romanian  
1489 Russian  
1491 Kinyarwanda  
1495 Sanskrit  
1498 Sindhi  
1501 Sangho  
1502 Serbo-  
Croatian  
1529 Tigrinya  
1531 Turkmen  
1532 Tagalog  
1534 Setswana  
1535 Tonga  
1538 Turkish  
1539 Tsonga  
1540 Tatar  
1543 Twi  
1557 Ukrainian  
1564 Urdu  
1572 Uzbek  
1581 Vietnamese  
1587 Volapük  
1613 Wolof  
1632 Xhosa  
1665 Yoruba  
1684 Chinese  
1697 Zulu  
1313 Latin  
1326 Lingala  
1327 Laothian  
1332 Lithuanian  
1334 Latvian;  
Lettish  
1171 Faroese  
1174 French  
1181 Frisian  
1503 Singhalese  
1505 Slovak  
1506 Slovenian  
1345 Malagasy  
1703 Not specified  
Parental Control/Area Code List  
Code Area  
Code Area  
Code Area  
Code Area  
2044 Argentina  
2047 Australia  
2046 Austria  
2057 Belgium  
2070 Brazil  
2079 Canada  
2090 Chile  
2165 Finland  
2174 France  
2109 Germany  
2248 India  
2238 Indonesia  
2254 Italy  
2276 Japan  
2304 Korea  
2363 Malaysia  
2362 Mexico  
2149 Spain  
2376 Netherlands  
2390 New Zealand  
2379 Norway  
2499 Sweden  
2086 Switzerland  
2528 Thailand  
2184 United  
Kingdom  
2427 Pakistan  
2424 Philippines  
2436 Portugal  
2489 Russia  
2092 China  
2115 Denmark  
2501 Singapore  
US  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
password or any other breach of security related to the Service, Site,  
and/or Software.  
Terms and Conditions of  
Use and End User  
License Agreement  
The Sony Blu-ray Disc player (“Product”) and associated software  
(“Software”) are provided and maintained by Sony Electronics Inc.  
and its affiliates (“Sony”). Sony also provides and maintains  
associated service (the “Service”), including any subsite accessible  
through the Service’s Internet homepage (the “Site”). The Software  
includes software embedded in the Product; stored on any media,  
bundled with the Product or otherwise provided by Sony;  
downloaded from the Site or otherwise made accessible or provided  
by Sony; any such media and any printed or “on-line” or electronic  
documentation associated with the Product and all updates and  
upgrades thereto.  
Sony’s Privacy Policy is posted on the Site and at  
http://products.sel.sony.com/SEL/legal/privacy.html, the  
terms of which are incorporated herein, and applies to your use of the  
Account, Product, Service, Site, and Software.  
4. Automatic Update  
The Software contains a functionality by which it is updated  
automatically when the Product is connected to a server belonging to  
Sony or to a third party designated by Sony. When you specify your  
intention not to use this automatic update functionality, or when the  
setting asking whether you wish to update automatically is activated  
and you decline to execute updates, it is assumed that you agree that  
the security functionality improvements, error corrections, other  
functional updates or any other changes offered by Sony through  
such updates would not be made to the Software and that your  
current and further use of the Software may be affected thereby.  
When the automatic update functionality described in the previous  
paragraph is activated, it is assumed that you agree (a) that the  
Software will be automatically updated as necessary to improve  
security functionality, to correct errors, to improve update  
functionality, or for other purposes, and (b) that this updating of the  
Software may be accompanied by the augmenting, modifying, or  
removing of functionality of the Software.  
WHEN YOU ACCESS, BROWSE, OR USE THE SERVICE,  
PRODUCT, SOFTWARE, AND/OR SITE, YOU ACCEPT,  
WITHOUT LIMITATION OR QUALIFICATION, THE TERMS  
AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH HEREIN, SONY’S PRIVACY  
POLICY POSTED ON THE SITE, AND ANY ADDITIONAL  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF USE SET FORTH IN ANY  
PORTION OF THE SERVICE AND SITE (COLLECTIVELY THE  
“AGREEMENT”). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS  
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT, SONY DOES NOT  
GRANT THE LIMITED RIGHTS HEREIN, AND PLEASE DO  
NOT USE THE SERVICE, PRODUCT, SOFTWARE, AND/OR  
SITE.  
5. Additional Terms Governing Product Software  
You may use the Software solely in conjunction with the Product that  
accompanied the Software. The Software is licensed, not sold. In  
addition to the terms set forth in other portions of this Agreement, the  
Software is subject to the following:  
Use of Software. You may use the Software in conjunction with the  
Product for personal use.  
Limitation on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and  
Disassembly. You may not modify, reverse engineer, decompile, or  
disassemble the Software in whole or in part.  
Separation of Components.The Software is licensed as a single  
product. Its component parts may not be separated for use on more  
than one device unless expressly authorized by Sony.  
Data Files. The Software may create data files automatically for use  
with the Software. Any such data files will be deemed as part of the  
Software.  
1. Ownership  
The Software and all materials on the Service and/or Site, including  
but not limited to images, software and text (the “Content”) are  
protected by copyright under U.S. copyright law, international  
conventions, and other copyright laws. You cannot use the Software,  
Service, Product, Content, and Site except as specified herein. There  
may be proprietary logos, service marks, and trademarks found on  
this Service or Site. By making them available on the Service and/or  
Site, Sony is not granting you any license to utilize those proprietary  
logos, service marks, or trademarks. Any unauthorized use of the  
Service, Site, Content or Software may violate copyright laws,  
trademark laws, the laws of privacy and publicity, and civil and  
criminal statutes. All title and copyright in and to the Software or  
materials on the Service/Site and any copies of the Software, are  
owned by Sony, its licensors, or suppliers. All rights not specifically  
granted under this Agreement are reserved by Sony, its licensors, and  
suppliers.  
Rental. You may not rent or lease the Software.  
Software Transfer. You may permanently transfer all of your rights  
under this Agreement only as part of a sale or transfer of Software  
accompanying the sale or transfer of your Product, provided you  
retain no copies, transfer all of the Software (including all copies,  
component parts, the media and printed materials, all versions and  
any upgrades of the Software and this Agreement), and the recipient  
agrees to the terms of this Agreement.  
Dependent Software. The software, network services or other  
products other than Software upon which the Software’s  
performance depends on might be interrupted or discontinued at the  
discretion of the suppliers (software suppliers, service providers or  
Sony).  
High Risk Activities. The Software is not fault-tolerant and is not  
designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-line  
control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe  
performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft  
navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life  
support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the  
Software could lead to death, personal injury, or severe physical or  
environmental damage (“High Risk Activities”). Sony and its  
suppliers specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of  
fitness for High Risk Activities.  
U.S. Government Restricted Rights. The Software is provided with  
RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the  
United States Government is subject to restriction as set forth in  
subparagraph (c) (1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software-  
Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Manufacturer  
is Sony Electronics Inc., 16530 Via Esprillo, San Diego, CA 92127.  
2. Your Rights & Limited License  
The Service, Site, Software, Content, and Product are only for your  
personal use. You are responsible for all your activities hereunder,  
including all legal liability incurred from your use of the Service or  
others who use the Service via your Product or Account (as defined  
below). You may use the Service, Site, Software, Content and  
Product for lawful purposes only. You may not distribute, exchange,  
modify, sell, or transmit anything you may copy from the Service or  
Site, including but not limited to any text, images, audio, and video,  
for any business, commercial, or public purpose. As long as you  
comply with the terms of this Agreement, Sony grants you a non-  
exclusive, non-transferable, limited right to enter, display, and use  
the Service, Site, and Software as set forth in this Agreement. You  
agree not to interrupt/disrupt or attempt to interrupt/disrupt the  
operation of this Service, Site or Software in any way.  
3. User Account & Privacy  
As part of your usage of the Product, Service, Site, and/or Software,  
Sony may require that you establish a user account (“Account”) for  
which you must provide Sony true, accurate, current, and complete  
information about yourself and maintain/promptly update such  
information. You are responsible for maintaining the confidentiality  
of any and all of your passwords associated with the Account. You  
agree to notify Sony immediately of any unauthorized use of your  
US  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GNU General Public, Lesser General Public, & Other Licenses.  
Notwithstanding terms in this Agreement, certain portions of the  
Software are governed by the GNU Lesser General Public License,  
Version 2.1 (LGPL), GNU General Public License Version 2 (GPL),  
and other open source code licenses (“Open Source Licenses”),  
copies of which are attached hereto and incorporated herein. For  
such portions of the Software, to the extent there is any conflict  
between this Agreement and the Open Source Licenses, the Open  
Source Licenses shall govern as applicable.  
Certain Source Code Availability. Sony is making available the  
source code of certain portions of the SOFTWARE per the GPL/  
LGPL LICENSES. Please see http://www.sony.com/linux for  
access to and instructions on obtaining such source code.  
9. Indemnification  
You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold Sony and all of its agents,  
directors, employees, information providers, licensors and licensees,  
affiliates, content providers, officers, and parent (collectively,  
“Indemnified Parties”), harmless from and against any and all  
liability and costs (including, without limitation, attorneys’ fees and  
costs), incurred by the Indemnified Parties in connection with any  
claim arising out of (i) any breach or alleged breach by you of this  
Agreement in any manner, (ii) any information you submit to Sony  
hereunder, (iii) any breach or alleged breach by you of a third party’s  
rights or (iv) any damage caused by or alleged to have been caused  
by you to the Service. You will cooperate as fully as reasonably  
required in Indemnified Party(s) defense of any claim. Sony and/or  
Indemnified Parties reserve the right, at its own expense, to assume  
the exclusive defense and control of any matter otherwise subject to  
indemnification by you and you shall not in any event settle any  
matter without the written consent of Sony and/or Indemnified  
Parties.  
6. Changes to Service  
Sony reserves the right to discontinue one, some, or all of the  
features of the Service you receive at any time at its discretion. Sony  
may, at its discretion and from time to time change, add or remove  
features and functionality, upgrade or modify the Service, Site and/  
or Software without notice. You may, at Sony’s discretion, receive  
messages regarding these changes and new features/functionality.  
Any new text, content, file, data, product, services, information,  
software, software tool or other feature provided by Sony (through  
the network or by CD-ROM or other means) (including, but not  
limited to, any update to Software provided to you automatically  
pursuant to Section 4 of this Agreement) will be subject to this  
Agreement; provided that, if separate terms and conditions  
applicable to such feature are provided to you, such terms and  
conditions shall apply to such feature in priority to this Agreement.  
10. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND DAMAGES;  
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  
YOU UNDERSTAND THAT USAGE OF THE PRODUCT AND  
SERVICE REQUIRES INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDED BY  
YOU, FOR WHICH YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE.  
OPERATION OF THE PRODUCT AND/OR SERVICE MAY BE  
LIMITED OR RESTRICTED DEPENDING UPON THE  
CAPABILITIES OR TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS OF YOUR  
INTERNET SERVICE.  
YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE, SERVICE, PRODUCT,  
CONTENT AND/OR SITE IS AT YOUR OWN RISK. THE  
SOFTWARE, SERVICE, CONTENT AND SITE ARE PROVIDED  
“AS IS” AND, TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMISSIBLE BY  
LAW, SONY MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR  
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER (1) FOR THE  
ACCURACY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT  
ASSOCIATED WITH THE SERVICE, SITE, AND/OR  
SOFTWARE; (2) THAT THE SERVER(S) THAT MAKES THE  
SERVICE, SOFTWARE, AND/OR SITE AVAILABLE ARE  
FREE OF VIRUSES OR OTHER COMPONENTS THAT MAY  
INFECT, HARM, OR CAUSE DAMAGE TO YOUR  
COMPUTER, TELEVISION, OTHER EQUIPMENT, OR ANY  
OTHER PROPERTY. FURTHERMORE, SONY DOES NOT  
WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS  
REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF  
THE SOFTWARE, SERVICE, AND/OR SITE IN TERMS OF ITS  
CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR  
OTHERWISE. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR  
ADVICE GIVEN BY SONY OR A SONY AUTHORIZED  
REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY OR IN  
ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY.  
SHOULD THE SOFTWARE, SERVICE, AND/OR SITE PROVE  
DEFECTIVE YOU (AND NOT SONY OR A SONY  
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE) ASSUME THE ENTIRE  
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR  
CORRECTION.  
7. Confidentiality  
You shall maintain the confidentiality of any information with  
regard to the Product and Documentation that is provided under this  
Agreement and is not publicly known. You agree not to disclose  
such information to any third party without the prior written consent.  
8. Sony’s Right to Terminate or Modify Terms or  
Conditions of this Agreement  
Sony may add to, change, or remove any part, term, or condition of  
this Agreement at any time, without prior notice. Any changes to this  
Agreement or any terms posted on the Service and/or Site apply as  
soon as they are posted. By continuing to use the Service, Product,  
Software and/or Site after any changes are posted, you are indicating  
your acceptance of those changes. SONY MAY ADD, CHANGE,  
DISCONTINUE, REMOVE, OR SUSPEND ANY OTHER  
CONTENT POSTED ON THE SERVICE AND/OR SITE,  
INCLUDING FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS OF  
PRODUCTS DESCRIBED OR DEPICTED ON THE SERVICE  
AND/OR SITE, TEMPORARILY OR PERMANENTLY, AT ANY  
TIME, WITHOUT NOTICE AND WITHOUT LIABILITY.  
WITHOUT PREJUDICE TO ANY OTHER RIGHTS, SONY MAY  
SUSPEND OR TERMINATE THIS AGREEMENT  
IMMEDIATELY UPON NOTICE IF YOU FAIL TO COMPLY  
WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS  
AGREEMENT. Upon termination, you shall destroy the Software  
within fourteen (14) days after the date of such termination, and upon  
Sony’s request, provide Sony with the certification of such  
destruction. Sony may take any legal and technical remedies to  
prevent the violation of and/or to enforce this Agreement, including  
without limitation, immediate termination of your access to the  
Service if we believe in our discretion you are violating this  
Agreement.  
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO SONY’S NEGLIGENCE OR ISSUES RELATED  
TO THIRD PARTY CONTENT PROVIDERS, SHALL SONY BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, DIRECT,  
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, PUNITIVE, OR SPECIAL  
DAMAGES RELATED TO (A) THE USE OF, (B) THE  
INABILITY TO USE, OR (C) ERRORS OR OMISSIONS IN THE  
SOFTWARE, SERVICE, PRODUCT, AND/OR SITE, EVEN IF  
SONY OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE THEREOF  
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  
DAMAGES. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE  
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF CONSEQUENTIAL OR  
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR  
EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL SONY’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL  
DAMAGES, LOSSES, AND CAUSES OF ACTION (WHETHER  
IN CONTRACT OR TORT, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) EXCEED $100.00.  
US  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. General Provisions  
This Agreement, the limited warranty accompanying the Product,  
plus any additional terms posted on the Service or Site, together  
constitute the entire agreement between Sony and you with respect  
to your use of the Product, Service, Site, Content, and Software. Any  
notice by Sony hereunder may be made by letter, email, or posting  
on the Service or Site. Any cause of action you may have with  
respect to your use of this Site must be commenced within one (1)  
year after the claim or cause of action arises. If for any reason a court  
of competent jurisdiction finds any provision of this Agreement, or  
portion thereof, to be unenforceable, that provision shall be enforced  
to the maximum extent permissible so as to affect the intent of this  
Agreement, and the remaining terms and conditions of the  
Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. This Agreement  
shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of  
the State of Delaware, United States of America, without reference  
to its conflicts of law rules. You agree to submit to the personal and  
exclusive jurisdiction of federal or state courts in Delaware.  
Software License  
Information  
Required public statement & License for  
GPL/LGPL licensed software used in this  
product  
This product contains software that is subject to the following GNU  
General Public License (“GPL”) or GNU Lesser General Public  
License (“LGPL”). These establish that customers have the right to  
acquire, modify, and redistribute the source code of said software in  
accordance with the terms of the GPL or the LGPL.  
Package List  
linux-kernel.tar.gz  
pump  
lrzsz  
busybox  
gcc  
glibc  
netbase  
dosfstools  
lzo  
mkcramfs  
hostname  
scfs  
The source code for the above-listed software is available on the  
Web.  
To download, please access the following URL:  
http://www.sony.net/Products/Linux  
Please note that Sony cannot answer or respond to any inquiries  
regarding the content of this source code.  
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
Version 2, June 1991  
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.  
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this  
license document, but changing it is not allowed.  
Preamble  
The Licenses for most software are designed to take away your  
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public  
License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change  
free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This  
General Public License applies to most of the Free Software  
Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors  
commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software  
is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You  
can apply it to your programs, too.  
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not  
price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that  
you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and  
charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or  
can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use  
pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these  
things.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid  
anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.  
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you  
distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.  
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether  
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you  
have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the  
source code. And you must show them these terms so they know  
their rights.  
US  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software,  
and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to  
copy, distribute and/or modify the software.  
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If  
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,  
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in  
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those  
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you  
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based  
on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of  
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the  
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote  
it.  
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain  
that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free  
software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on,  
we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original,  
so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the  
original authors’ reputations.  
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software  
patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free  
program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the  
program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any  
patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.  
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your  
rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise  
the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works  
based on the Program.  
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the  
Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on  
a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other  
work under the scope of this License.  
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and  
modification follow.  
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND  
CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND  
MODIFICATION  
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,  
under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the  
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of  
the following:  
0. This License applies to any program or other work which  
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be  
distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The  
“Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a  
“work based on the Program” means either the Program or any  
derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work  
containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with  
modifications and/or translated into another language.  
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term  
“modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.  
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-  
readable source code, which must be distributed under the  
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily  
used for software interchange; or,  
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three  
years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your  
cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete  
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to  
be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a  
medium customarily used for software interchange; or,  
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the  
offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This  
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution  
and only if you received the program in object code or  
executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection  
b above.)  
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not  
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of  
running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the  
Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the  
Program (independent of having been made by running the  
Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s  
source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you  
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an  
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep  
intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence  
of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a  
copy of this License along with the Program.  
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for  
making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source  
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any  
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control  
compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special  
exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that  
is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the  
major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating  
system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself  
accompanies the executable.  
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and  
you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a  
fee.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any  
portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy  
and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of  
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these  
conditions:  
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering  
access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent  
access to copy the source code from the same place counts as  
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not  
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.  
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices  
stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.  
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that  
in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or  
any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all  
third parties under the terms of this License.  
c) If the modified program normally reads commands  
interactively when run, you must cause it, when started  
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to  
print or display an announcement including an appropriate  
copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or  
else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may  
redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling  
the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the  
Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such  
an announcement, your work based on the Program is not  
required to print an announcement.)  
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program  
except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt  
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program  
is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this  
License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,  
from you under this License will not have their licenses  
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.  
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not  
signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify  
or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions  
are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  
Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any  
work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this  
License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,  
distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.  
US  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the  
Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the  
original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program  
subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any  
further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights  
granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance  
by third parties to this License.  
NO WARRANTY  
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF  
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE  
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY  
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE  
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/  
OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS”  
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER  
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND  
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  
SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU  
ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,  
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent  
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent  
issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,  
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this  
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this  
License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously  
your obligations under this License and any other pertinent  
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the  
Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit  
royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who  
receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only  
way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain  
entirely from distribution of the Program.  
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW  
OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT  
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY  
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED  
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,  
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE  
OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING  
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY  
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE  
PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER  
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under  
any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to  
apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other  
circumstances.  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any  
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any  
such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the  
integrity of the free software distribution system, which is  
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made  
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed  
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that  
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to  
distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot  
impose that choice.  
PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY  
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  
DAMAGES.  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs  
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest  
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it  
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under  
these terms.  
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to  
be a consequence of the rest of this License.  
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in  
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces,  
the original copyright holder who places the Program under this  
License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation  
excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in  
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License  
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this  
License.  
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to  
attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey  
the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the  
“copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.  
<one line to give the program’s name and an idea of what it does.>  
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>  
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new  
versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such  
new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but  
may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify  
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published  
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or  
(at your option) any later version.  
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the  
Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to  
it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms  
and conditions either of that version or of any later version published  
by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a  
version number of this License, you may choose any version ever  
published by the Free Software Foundation.  
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but  
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty  
of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.  
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License  
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software  
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-  
1307, USA.  
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free  
programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the  
author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted  
by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software  
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our  
decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free  
status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the  
sharing and reuse of software generally.  
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper  
mail.  
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this  
when it starts in an interactive mode:  
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author  
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for  
details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to  
redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.  
US  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the  
appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the  
commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and  
‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever  
suits your program.  
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the  
library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal  
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.  
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there  
is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by  
someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what  
they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s  
reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced  
by others.  
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or  
your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program,  
if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the  
program ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written  
by James Hacker.  
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of  
any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot  
effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a  
restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any  
patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent  
with the full freedom of use specified in this license.  
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989  
Ty Coon, President of Vice  
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your  
program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine  
library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary  
applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the  
GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.  
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the  
ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser  
General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is  
quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this  
license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries  
into non-free programs.  
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
Version 2.1, February 1999  
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.  
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this  
license document, but changing it is not allowed.  
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using  
a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a  
combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary  
General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the  
entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General  
Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with  
the library.  
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts  
as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence  
the version number 2.1.]  
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it  
does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the ordinary General  
Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less  
of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These  
disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public  
License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides  
advantages in certain special circumstances.  
Preamble  
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your  
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public  
Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change  
free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.  
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some  
specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the  
Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it.  
You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about  
whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the  
better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the  
explanations below.  
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to  
encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it  
becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs  
must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free  
library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this  
case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software  
only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.  
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use,  
not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure  
that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and  
charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or  
can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use  
pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you  
can do these things.  
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free  
programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of  
free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in  
non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU  
operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating  
system.  
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the  
users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked  
with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that  
program using a modified version of the Library.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid  
distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these  
rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you  
if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.  
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and  
modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a  
“work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The  
former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter  
must be combined with the library in order to run.  
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or  
for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you.  
You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source  
code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide  
complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them  
with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling  
it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.  
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND  
CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND  
MODIFICATION  
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other  
program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder  
or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the  
terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this  
License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.  
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data  
prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs  
(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.  
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work  
which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on the  
Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under  
US  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a  
portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated  
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is  
included without limitation in the term “modification”.)  
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the  
Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a  
volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other  
work under the scope of this License.  
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for  
making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code  
means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any  
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control  
compilation and installation of the library.  
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General  
Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the  
Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this  
License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public  
License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version  
than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has  
appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.)  
Do not make any other change in these notices.  
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not  
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of  
running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output  
from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work  
based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool  
for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does  
and what the program that uses the Library does.  
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that  
copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all  
subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.  
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the  
Library into a program that is not a library.  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s  
complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided  
that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy  
an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep  
intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence  
of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with  
the Library.  
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or  
derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable  
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you  
accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable  
source code, which must be distributed under the terms of  
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for  
software interchange.  
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and  
you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a  
fee.  
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from  
a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source  
code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the  
source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the  
source along with the object code.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any  
portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy  
and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of  
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these  
conditions:  
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the  
Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being  
compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the  
Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the  
Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.  
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.  
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices  
stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.  
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no  
charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.  
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a  
table of data to be supplied by an application program that  
uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the  
facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to  
ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such  
function or table, the facility still operates, and performs  
whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.  
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has  
a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the  
application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any  
application-supplied function or table used by this function must  
be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root  
function must still compute square roots.)  
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library  
creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it  
contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the  
library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section  
6 states terms for distribution of such executables.  
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file  
that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a  
derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.  
Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked  
without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold  
for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.  
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure  
layouts and assessors, and small macros and small inline functions  
(ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is  
unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.  
(Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library  
will still fall under Section 6.)  
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If  
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the  
Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and  
separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do  
not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate  
works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a  
whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of  
the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose  
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may  
distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.  
Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,  
whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.  
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or  
link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce a  
work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work  
under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit  
modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse  
engineering for debugging such modifications.  
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and  
thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.  
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your  
rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise  
the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works  
based on the Library.  
US  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the  
Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by  
this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work  
during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the  
copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference  
directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one  
of these things:  
or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are  
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by  
modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the  
Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,  
and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or  
modifying the Library or works based on it.  
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the  
Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the  
original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the  
Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not  
impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the  
rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing  
compliance by third parties with this License.  
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding  
machine-readable source code for the Library including  
whatever changes were used in the work (which must be  
distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is  
an executable linked with the Library, with the complete  
machine-readable “work that uses the Library”, as object  
code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the  
Library and then relink to produce a modified executable  
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the  
user who changes the contents of definitions files in the  
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the  
application to use the modified definitions.)  
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the  
Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time  
a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer  
system, rather than copying library functions into the  
executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified  
version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the  
modified version is interface-compatible with the version that  
the work was made with.  
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent  
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent  
issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,  
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this  
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this  
License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously  
your obligations under this License and any other pertinent  
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the  
Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit  
royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive  
copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you  
could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely  
from distribution of the Library.  
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under  
any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to  
apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other  
circumstances.  
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least  
three years, to give the same user the materials specified in  
Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of  
performing this distribution.  
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy  
from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the  
above specified materials from the same place.  
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these  
materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any  
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any  
such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the  
integrity of the free software distribution system which is  
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made  
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed  
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that  
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to  
distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot  
impose that choice.  
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the  
Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for  
reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception,  
the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is  
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major  
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on  
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies  
the executable.  
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to  
be a consequence of the rest of this License.  
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain  
countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the  
original copyright holder who places the Library under this  
License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation  
excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in  
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License  
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this  
License.  
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license  
restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally  
accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you  
cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that  
you distribute.  
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the  
Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library  
facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a  
combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the  
work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is  
otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:  
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new  
versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time.  
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,  
but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same  
work based on the Library, uncombined with any other  
library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of  
the Sections above.  
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact  
that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining  
where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the  
same work.  
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library  
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and  
“any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and  
conditions either of that version or of any later version published by  
the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a  
license version number, you may choose any version ever published  
by the Free Software Foundation.  
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute  
the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any  
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or  
distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate  
your rights under this License. However, parties who have  
received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not  
have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in  
full compliance.  
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not  
signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify  
US  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free  
programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with  
these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software  
which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to  
the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions  
for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library  
‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random  
Hacker.  
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990  
Ty Coon, President of Vice  
That’s all there is to it!  
preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software  
and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.  
Required statements for OpenSSL project  
used in this product  
This product contains OpenSSL (including the library Original  
SSLeay), which Sony uses under license with the copyright holder.  
In compliance with a request by the copyright holder of said  
software, Sony conveys the following notice and asks that you read  
it.  
NO WARRANTY  
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF  
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY,  
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE  
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES  
PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY  
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO  
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS  
WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE,  
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY  
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
Package name: sony-target-grel-openssl-0.9.8g-020201.src.rpm  
OpenSSL  
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions  
are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW  
OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT  
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY  
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED  
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,  
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE  
OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING  
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY  
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above  
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided  
with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this  
software must display the following acknowledgment:  
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL  
Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)  
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not  
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this  
software without prior written permission. For written  
permission, please contact [email protected].  
LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE),  
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN  
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
5. Products derived from this software may not be called  
“OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without  
prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries  
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest  
possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software  
that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by  
permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under  
the terms of the ordinary General Public License).  
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following  
acknowledgment:  
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL  
Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT  
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR  
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF  
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,  
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)  
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGE.  
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is  
safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most  
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should  
have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full  
notice is found.  
<one line to give the library’s name and an idea of what it does.>  
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>  
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it  
under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as  
published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the  
License, or (at your option) any later version.  
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but  
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty  
of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more  
details.  
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young  
([email protected]). This product includes software written by  
Tim Hudson ([email protected]).  
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public  
License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software  
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-  
1307 USA  
Original SSLeay License  
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper  
mail.  
Original SSLeay  
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected])  
All rights reserved.  
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or  
your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library,  
if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:  
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young  
US  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes  
SSL.  
FreeType  
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner,  
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as  
specified below.  
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long  
as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions  
apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash,  
DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation  
included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright  
terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).  
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED ‘AS IS’ WITHOUT  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR  
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES  
CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE  
FREETYPE PROJECT.  
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices  
in the code are not to be removed.  
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given  
attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.  
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in  
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.  
Notice about NetBSD Software  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions  
are met:  
BSD License  
Copyright (c) 1994-2004 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights  
reserved.  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions  
are met:  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above  
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided  
with the distribution.  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above  
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided  
with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this  
software must display the following acknowledgement:  
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric  
Young ([email protected])”  
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the  
library being used are not cryptographic related :-).  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this  
software must display the following acknowledgement:  
This product includes software developed by the NetBSD  
Foundation, Inc. and its contributors.  
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative  
thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must  
include an acknowledgement:  
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson  
4. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its  
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived  
from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS”  
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND  
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS  
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF  
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,  
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN  
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF  
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR  
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF  
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,  
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER  
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER  
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING  
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT  
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF  
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available  
version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code  
cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence  
[including the GNU Public Licence.]  
The following notices are required to satisfy the license terms of the  
software that we have mentioned in this document:  
This product includes software developed by Adam Glass.  
This product includes software developed by Bill Paul.  
This product includes software developed by Charles M. Hannum.  
This product includes software developed by Christian E. Hopps.  
This product includes software developed by Christopher G.  
Demetriou.  
This product includes software developed by Christopher G.  
Demetriou for the NetBSD Project.  
This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.  
This product includes software developed by Gardner Buchanan.  
This product includes software developed by Gordon W. Ross  
US  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone for the  
NetBSD Project.  
Portions copyright Robert de Bath, Joris van Rantwijk, Delian  
Delchev, Andreas Schultz, Jeroen Massar, Wez Furlong, Nicolas  
Barry, Justin Bradford, Ben Harris, Malcolm Smith, Ahmad Khalifa,  
Markus Kuhn, and CORE SDI S.A.  
This product includes software developed by Manuel Bouyer.  
This product includes software developed by Rolf Grossmann.  
This product includes software developed by TooLs GmbH.  
This product includes software developed by the NetBSD  
Foundation, Inc. and its contributors.  
This product includes software developed by the University of  
California, Berkeley and its contributors.  
This product includes software developed by the University of  
California, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors.  
This product includes software developed by the University of  
California, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory.  
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining  
a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the  
“Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including  
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,  
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to  
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject  
to the following conditions:  
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be  
included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.  
This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by  
Wasabi Systems, Inc.  
This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by  
Matthias Drochner..  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL  
SIMON TATHAM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES  
OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF  
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT  
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE  
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.  
Notice about JPEG  
Parts of this product utilize the research results of the Independent  
JPEG Group.  
Package name sony-target-grel-libjpeg-6b-020201.src.rpm.  
In plain English:  
1. We don’t promise that this software works. (But if you find any  
bugs, please let us know!)  
Notice about fdlibm Software  
@(#)fdlibm.h 1.5 95/01/18  
2. You can use this software for whatever you want. You don’t  
have to pay us.  
Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Developed at SunSoft, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.  
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely  
granted,provided that this notice is preserved.  
3. You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it  
in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your  
documentation that you’ve used the IJG code.  
In legalese:  
Notice about Root Certificates  
In addition, the Runtimes and Runtime Components may contain one  
or more root certificates (herein referred to as “Root Certificates”).  
You may not modify the Root Certificates.  
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either  
express or implied, with respect to this software, its quality,  
accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. This  
software is provided “AS IS”, and you, its user assume the entire risk  
as to its quality and accuracy.  
Notice about Nano-XML  
This software is copyright (c) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane.  
All Rights Reserved except as specified below.  
Copyright (C) 2000-2002 Marc De Scheemaecker, All Rights  
Reserved.  
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this  
software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject  
to these conditions:  
(1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then  
this README file must be included, with this copyright and no-  
warranty notice unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes  
to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying  
documentation.  
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying  
documentation must state that “this software is based in part on the  
work of the Independent JPEG Group”.  
(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user  
accepts full responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the  
authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind.  
This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied  
warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages  
arising from the use of this software.  
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose,  
including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it  
freely, subject to the following restrictions:  
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must  
not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this  
software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product  
documentation would be appreciated but is not required.  
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and  
must not be misrepresented as being the original software.  
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source  
distribution.  
These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the  
IJG code, not just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you  
ought to acknowledge us.  
Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author’s name or  
company name in advertising or publicity relating to this software or  
products derived from it. This software may be referred to only as  
“the Independent JPEG Group’s software”.  
We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the  
basis of commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability  
claims are assumed by the product vendor.  
Notice about PuTTY Software  
This product contains some code of the application PuTTY.  
Source package: putty-0.58.tar.gz  
License text: http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/  
licence.html  
PuTTY is copyright 1997-2006 Simon Tatham.  
US  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BD-RE  
BD-RE (Blu-ray Disc Rewritable) is a  
recordable and rewritable Blu-ray Disc,  
available in the same capacities as the BD  
below. The re-recordable feature makes  
extensive editing and time-shifting applications  
possible.  
Glossary  
AACS  
“Advanced Access Content System” is a  
specification for managing digital entertainment  
contents stored on the next generation of  
prerecorded and recorded optical media. The  
specification enables consumers to enjoy digital  
entertainment content, including high-definition  
content.  
BD-ROM  
BD-ROMs (Blu-ray Disc Read-Only Memory)  
are commercially produced discs and are  
available in the same capacities as the BD  
below. Other than conventional movie and video  
contents, these discs have enhanced features  
such as interactive content, menu operations  
using pop-up menus, selection of subtitle  
display, and slideshow. Although a BD-ROM  
may contain any form of data, most BD-ROM  
discs will contain movies in High Definition  
format, for playback on Blu-ray Disc/DVD  
players.  
AVCHD  
The AVCHD format is a high-definition digital  
video camera format used to record SD  
(standard definition) or HD (high definition)  
signals of either the 1080i specification* or the  
720p specification** on DVDs, using efficient  
data compression coding technology. The  
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format is adopted to  
compress video data, and the Dolby Digital or  
Linear PCM system is used to compress audio  
data. The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format is  
capable of compressing images at higher  
efficiency than that of the conventional image  
compression format. The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264  
format enables a high definition (HD) video  
signal shot on a digital video camera recorder to  
be recorded on DVD discs in the same way as it  
would be for a standard definition (SD)  
television signal.  
Blu-ray Disc (BD)  
A disc format developed for recording/playing  
high-definition (HD) video (for HDTV, etc.),  
and for storing large amounts of data. A single  
layer Blu-ray Disc holds up to 25 GB, and a  
dual-layer Blu-ray Disc holds up to 50 GB of  
data.  
Digital Cinema Auto Calibration  
Digital Cinema Auto Calibration was developed  
by Sony to automatically measure and adjusts  
the speaker settings to your listening  
* A high definition specification that utilizes 1080  
effective scanning lines and the interlace format.  
**A high definition specification that utilizes 720  
effective scanning lines and the progressive format.  
environment in a short period of time.  
Dolby Digital  
BD-J application  
The BD-ROM format supports Java for  
interactive functions.  
“BD-J” offers content providers almost  
unlimited functionality when creating  
interactive BD-ROM titles.  
This movie theater sound format is more  
advanced than Dolby Surround Pro Logic. In  
this format, the surround speakers output stereo  
sound with an expanded frequency range, and a  
subwoofer channel for deep bass is  
independently provided. This format is also  
called “5.1” with the subwoofer channel  
designed as the 0.1 channel (since it functions  
only when a deep bass effect is needed). All six  
channels in this format are recorded separately  
for superior channel separation. Furthermore,  
since all the signals are processed digitally, less  
signal degradation occurs.  
BD-R  
BD-R (Blu-ray Disc Recordable) is a  
recordable, write-once Blu-ray Disc, available  
in the same capacities as the BD below. Since  
contents can be recorded and cannot be  
overwritten, a BD-R can be used to archive  
valuable data or storing and distributing video  
material.  
US  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Dolby Digital Plus  
being recorded discretely and processed in  
digitally.  
Developed as an extension to Dolby Digital, the  
audio coding technology supports 7.1 multi-  
channel surround sound.  
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio  
Developed as an extension to DTS Digital  
Surround format. It supports a maximum  
sampling frequency of 96 kHz, and 7.1 multi-  
channel surround.  
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio has a  
maximum transmission rate of 6 Mbps, with  
lossy compression (Lossy).  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth  
output channels from 2 channel sources. This is  
done using an advanced, high-purity matrix  
surround decoder that extracts the spatial  
properties of the original recording without  
adding any new sounds or tonal colorations.  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
x Movie mode  
DTS-HD Master Audio has a maximum  
transmission rate of 24.5 Mbps, and uses  
lossless compression (Lossless), and DTS-HD  
Master Audio corresponds to a maximum  
sampling frequency of 192 kHz, and maximum  
of 7.1ch.  
The Movie mode is for use with stereo television  
shows and all programs encoded in Dolby  
Surround. The result is enhanced sound field  
directionality that approaches the quality of  
discrete 5.1-channel sound.  
x Music mode  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface)  
The Music mode is for use with any stereo music  
recordings, and provides a wide and deep sound  
space.  
HDMI is an interface that supports both video  
and audio on a single digital connection,  
allowing you to enjoy high quality digital  
picture and sound. The HDMI specification  
supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital  
Content Protection), a copy protection  
technology that incorporates coding technology  
for digital video signals.  
Dolby Surround Pro Logic  
As one method of decoding Dolby Surround,  
Dolby Surround Pro Logic produces four  
channels from 2 channel sound. Compared with  
the former Dolby Surround system, Dolby  
Surround Pro Logic reproduces left-to-right  
panning more naturally and localizes sounds  
more precisely. To take full advantage of Dolby  
Surround Pro Logic, you should have one pair of  
surround speakers and a center speaker. The  
surround speakers output monaural sound.  
Interlace format  
(Interlaced scanning)  
The Interlace format is the NTSC standard  
method for displaying TV images at 30 frames  
per second. Each frame is scanned twice -  
alternately between the even numbered scanning  
lines and then odd numbered scanning lines, at  
60 times per second.  
Dolby TrueHD  
Dolby TrueHD is a lossless coding technology  
that supports up to 8 channels of multi-channel  
surround sound for the next generation optical  
discs. The reproduced sound is true to the  
original source bit-for-bit.  
LTH (Low to High)  
LTH is a recording system that supports organic  
pigment type BD-R.  
DTS  
Parental Control  
Digital audio compression technology  
developed by DTS, Inc. This technology  
conforms to 5.1-channel surround. This format  
comprises of stereo rear channel and there is  
discrete subwoofer channel in this format. DTS  
provides the same 5.1 discrete channels of high  
quality digital audio. The good channel  
separation is realized due to the all channel data  
A function of the BD/DVD to limit playback of  
the disc by the age of the users according to the  
limitation level in each country. The limitation  
varies from disc to disc; when it is activated,  
playback is completely prohibited, violent  
scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes  
and so on.  
US  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
PhotoTV HD  
This standard can express a wider color range  
than the currently used broadcast standard.  
“PhotoTV HD” allows for a highly-detailed  
pictures, and photo-like expression of subtle  
textures and colors. By connecting Sony  
“PhotoTV HD” compatible devices using an  
HDMI cable, whole new world of photos can be  
enjoyed in breathtaking Full HD quality. For  
instance, the delicate texture of the human skin,  
flowers, sand and waves can now be displayed  
on a large screen in beautiful photo-like quality.  
24p True Cinema  
Movies shot with a film camera consist of 24  
frames per second.  
Since conventional televisions (both CRT and  
flat panels) display frames either at 1/60 or 1/50  
second intervals, the 24 frames do not appear at  
an even pace.  
When connected to a TV with 24p capabilities,  
the player displays each frame at 1/24 second  
intervals — the same interval originally shot  
with the film camera, thus faithfully reproducing  
the original cinema image.  
Pop-up menu  
An enhanced menu operation available on BD-  
ROMs. The pop-up menu appears when POP  
UP/MENU is pressed during playback, and can  
be operated while playback is in progress.  
Progressive format  
(sequential scanning)  
In contrast to the Interlace format, the  
progressive format can reproduce 50 - 60 frames  
per second by reproducing all scanning lines  
(525 lines for the NTSC system). The overall  
picture quality increases and still images, text  
and horizontal lines appear sharper. This format  
is compatible with the 525 or 625 progressive  
format.  
S-AIR  
(Sony Audio Interactive Radio  
frequency)  
Recent times have seen the rapid spread of DVD  
media, Digital Broadcasting, and other high-  
quality media.  
To ensure that the subtle nuances of these high-  
quality media are transmitted with no  
deterioration, Sony has developed a technology  
called “S-AIR” for the radio transmission of  
digital audio signals with no compression, and  
has incorporated this technology into the EZW-  
RT10/EZW-T100.  
This technology transfers digital audio signals  
with no compression using the 2.4 GHz band  
range of ISM band (Industrial, Scientific, and  
Medical band), such as wireless LANs and  
Bluetooth applications.  
x.v.Color  
x.v.Color is a familiar term for the xvYCC  
standard proposed by Sony.  
xvYCC is an international standard for Color  
space in video.  
US  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Index  
Numerics  
Playable discs 130  
E
A
F
R
H
HDMI  
HDMI (High-Definition  
Hybrid Disc Playback Layer  
S
B
BDAV 130  
I
BDMV 130  
L
C
M
N
T
D
U
O
V
DVD 65, 130  
X
P
Parental Control Region Code  
US  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Server Technology Network Card Global Security Modem User Manual
Sharp Marine Radio PW E420 User Manual
Sharp Microwave Oven R 21LTF User Manual
Singer Sewing Machine 111W155 User Manual
Singer Sewing Machine G115 User Manual
Soleus Air Air Conditioner MAC 7500 User Manual
Sony Computer Monitor 500A3WE User Manual
Sony MP3 Docking Station 4286723112 User Manual
Sterling Plumbing Outdoor Shower 71090116 User Manual
Stiga Lawn Mower 8211 0229 06 User Manual